JP2014239865A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent instability in electrical potential in signal wiring connecting electric parts such as a control circuit.SOLUTION: In a game controlling device, installed are: clock signal outputting means (113) outputting clock signal to game controlling means; and a composite resistor (71) comprising a plurality of resistance elements, a common terminal (COM) which is connected to one of terminal of the plurality of resistance elements and to which a predetermined voltage is applied from outside and a plurality of individual terminals connected to the other terminal of each of the plurality of resistance elements. By connecting the individual terminals of the composite resistor with signal wiring for transmitting the clock signal from the clock signal outputting means to the game controlling means and applying the predetermined voltage to the individual terminals via the resistance elements, a voltage level within a predetermined range may be transmitted to the game controlling means as clock signal. A part of the individual terminals among the plurality of individual terminals of the composite resistor is not connected with the signal wiring and subjected to the same voltage with the common terminal.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a game control device that has game control means for comprehensively controlling a game and can give a specific game value to a player in response to detection of a predetermined game medium.

  A pachinko gaming machine as an example of a conventional gaming machine includes a gaming board having a gaming area in which a gaming ball is driven in front, and a start winning detection for detecting a winning of a gaming ball at a starting port provided in the gaming board. Fluctuation that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a variable display device starts a variable display of a plurality of symbols on the basis of detection of a game ball by the sensor and the start winning detection sensor and stops in a predetermined combination Some have a game control device that controls the execution of a display game.

  In addition, pachinko gaming machines generally include a ball detection sensor that detects the winning of a game ball in a winning opening provided in the game area on the front of the game board, and controls the game based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection sensor. The device instructs the ball payout control device to pay out the game ball as a prize. In the gaming machine as described above, the detection signal is transmitted to the game control device by connecting the signal wiring from the ball detection sensor to the game control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In conventional gaming machines, a magnetic proximity sensor having a coil for detecting a change in magnetic field due to a game ball is widely used as a start winning detection sensor or a ball detection sensor. In a gaming machine using such a proximity sensor as a ball detection sensor, a predetermined sensor voltage is applied by connecting the terminal of a signal wiring for connection with a game control device to a power supply voltage terminal via a pull-up resistor. When the ball detection sensor is in the non-detection state, a voltage close to the GND potential is applied to the input port of the game control device by the signal wiring, and in the detection state, the voltage level is changed by the pull-up resistance of the signal wiring, thereby controlling the game The device can determine whether or not the ball detection sensor has detected a game ball.

JP 2007-75404 A

In conventional gaming machines, game control is performed according to changes in the potential of signal wiring connecting between electronic components such as a control circuit. Therefore, when the potential of signal wiring connecting between electronic components becomes unstable. There was a risk that the gaming machine would malfunction.
The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine that prevents the potential of signal wiring connecting between electronic components such as a control circuit from becoming unstable and does not malfunction. For the purpose.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention described in claim 1
A game control device having game control means for comprehensively controlling a game, and capable of giving a player a specific game value in response to detection of a predetermined game medium;
A clock signal output means for outputting an operation clock signal of the game control means or a clock signal based thereon;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game control device includes:
A plurality of resistance elements, a common terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected together and a predetermined voltage is applied from the outside, and a plurality of terminals in which the other terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected to each element A composite resistor having individual terminals, and
One of the individual terminals of the composite resistor is connected to a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means, and a predetermined voltage is applied via the resistance element. The clock signal output means can be configured to transmit a predetermined range of voltage levels as the clock signal to the game control means,
Among the plurality of individual terminals of the composite resistor, the same voltage as the predetermined voltage applied to the common terminal is applied to some of the individual terminals without connecting the signal wiring. It is characterized by.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, even if the connection of the common terminal of the composite resistor is poor and a stable voltage is not applied from the outside, some of the individual terminals are not Since the same voltage as the predetermined voltage applied to the common terminal is applied without connecting the signal wiring, the potential of the common terminal node of the plurality of resistance elements connected to the common terminal becomes floating, and the clock signal is output. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the potential of the signal wiring to be transmitted is not determined.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means is composed of a wiring pattern of a conductive layer formed on an insulating substrate, and the insulating substrate is placed in the middle of the wiring pattern. A through hole is formed through which the individual terminals of the composite resistor can be connected to penetrate,
The composite resistor is connected to the wiring pattern through the through hole.

  Conventionally, a pull-up resistor connected to a signal wiring for transmitting a signal output by an open collector method is generally connected by branching a wiring pattern. According to the invention described in claim 2, Since the composite resistor is connected to the wiring pattern through a through hole provided in the middle of the wiring pattern, the composite resistor can be connected to the wiring pattern without branching the wiring pattern.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a potential of a signal wiring connecting between electronic components such as a control circuit from becoming unstable, and to realize a gaming machine that does not malfunction.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structural example of the game board of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system and game control apparatus which are provided in the back surface of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production | presentation control apparatus which comprises the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half of the main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball remaining number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an error check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure display process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting process 1 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of effect mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 (at the time-short end). It is a figure which shows the example of a top university winning opening opening / closing pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port signal edit process. It is a block diagram which shows the concrete structure of the game microcomputer which comprises the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the specific structure of the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) of 1st Embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows the equivalent circuit of the composite type resistor used for the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) of 1st Embodiment. It is an address map which shows the method of producing | generating the chip selection signal at the time of comprising the I / O expansion system in the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the specific structure in the case of inputting a detection signal using a relay terminal board | substrate in the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a layout diagram showing a specific structure of a composite resistor used in the game control device (main board) of the first embodiment and a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit thereof. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the control timing of the data reading process from the external device and the data writing process which are performed by CPU of the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the modification of a circuit in the case of inputting a detection signal using a relay terminal board | substrate in the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) of 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of the data read-out process from the external device performed by CPU of the game control apparatus of a modification. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the structural example of the relay board which outputs the signal to the conventional game control apparatus (main board | substrate) and a test device. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the structural example of the relay board | substrate which outputs a signal to the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) and test device in 2nd Example of 1st Embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) and relay board | substrate in the modification of a 2nd Example. It is a circuit block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control apparatus (main board | substrate) and relay board | substrate in the 2nd modification of a 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows the example of bit allocation to the output port only for the test signal output to a test device from a game control device (main board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of bit allocation to the output port only for the test signal output to a test device from a game control device (main board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of the signal for input / output output to a test device from a game control apparatus (main board | substrate). It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number generation circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process when update of the value of a latch register is set. It is a timing chart which shows the latch timing of the random number when a latch permission prohibition register is set to latch permission. It is a wave form diagram which shows the example of a waveform of the drive pulse of a big winning opening solenoid. It is a wave form diagram which shows the waveform of the drive pulse from which a duty differs. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the setting of a PWM control register, and the PWM pulse which drives a big prize opening solenoid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the bit of a PWM control register, and setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the jackpot medium and large winning opening control table which determines a big winning opening opening pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big prize opening / closing time table which determines big prize opening / closing time. It is a block diagram of a control system and a game control device provided in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 114 is a block diagram of an effect control device in the control system of FIG. 113. It is a flowchart of the special figure game process in the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of special figure routine processing in the special figure game process of FIG. 115. It is a flowchart of the 1stCPU main process performed by the microcomputer for main control of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. 118 is a flowchart of a power saving execution setting process in the 1st CPU main process of FIG. 117. FIG. 118 is a continuation of the flowchart of the power saving execution setting process in FIG. 118. 6 is a timing chart showing the operation of the gaming machine of the embodiment when the effect control device detects an error in a state where the power saving function is on. 6 is a timing chart showing an operation of the gaming machine of the embodiment when the game control device detects an error in a state where the power saving function is on. It is a timing chart which shows operation of a game machine in a modification of the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows operation of a game machine in a modification of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining switching of the volume setting part and power saving function in the modification of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure usual process performed by the microcomputer for games of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the power-saving cancellation | release / power-saving start confirmation monitoring process in the special figure usual process of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a side view of the movable accessory with which this game board is equipped. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of the big prize opening of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern table used with the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the light emission aspect of the display apparatus with which the gaming machine of the embodiment is provided. It is a figure explaining the power-saving control table used with the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the power saving control table of FIG. It is a flowchart of the movable body control process in the 1st CPU main process of FIG. It is a flowchart of the initialization sequence process in the movable body control process of FIG. It is a flowchart of the normal sequence process in the movable body control process of FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-saving start sequence process in the movable body control process of FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-saving cancellation | release sequence process in the movable body control process of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the operation after powering on the gaming machine of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart of a power-saving middle frame opening monitoring process executed in a modification of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various setting information set in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of a push button input process executed by the main control microcomputer of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the game shop setting information change operation monitoring process in the push button input process of FIG. It is a flowchart of the player setting information change operation monitoring process in the push button input process of FIG. It is a flowchart of 1stCPU main processing performed by the microcomputer for main control of the embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of an FeRAM initial setting process in the 1st CPU main process of FIG. 144. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of an internal RAM initial setting process in the 1st CPU main process of FIG. 144. FIG. It is a flowchart of the setting information initialization process in the 1st CPU main process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of various setting screens.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or performance, a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effects), a glass frame 15 A brightness sensor 20 for detecting the brightness around the gaming machine is provided on the right side of the front side to perform power saving control. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and an upper plate from which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. A ball outlet 22, a lower tray 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like are provided. Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. The effect button 25 forms an operation means with a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
The effect button 25 is provided with an operation button such as a push button and a select button for a selection operation. In addition to a switch for detecting a push operation and a switch for detecting a selection operation, a touch sensor for detecting a flick operation such as a stroke is provided. Built in.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating is provided at an upper part and a right part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be converted to a state in which a game ball can easily flow into the upper portion by opening it in the shape of a reverse “C” at the top, and a second start winning opening ( An ordinary variable winning device (Fuden) 37 having a starting winning area is provided.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is won. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). Note that it is possible to make it possible to win game balls even in the closed state, and in the closed state, it is possible to make the game balls difficult to win than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower large size) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the inside of the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  Also, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided. The second special variation prize winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members 39c, 39c, and the pair of movable members 39c, 39c is normally closed with a gap of about the diameter of the game ball (disadvantageous for the player). Hold). However, an armor portion 40a that restricts the inflow of the game ball to the inside of the center case 40 extends above the second special variable prize-winning device 39 so that the game ball cannot win in the closed state. Yes. When the result of the special figure change display game is a predetermined stop display mode and a special game state is entered, a reverse “C” character is formed by the special prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. The game ball is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) where the game ball can be easily opened and the game ball can flow in, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Yes. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). In the special game state, one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is released, and which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. Is done.

In addition, a photoelectric non-contact sensor 47 that detects that the player holds his / her hand is provided on the right side of the center case 40. The detection signal of this sensor is used as a trigger or the like for notifying the advance notice of the prefetch result when the start memory (holding) has occurred.
Moreover, you may make it use the non-contact sensor 47 for selection of the presentation mode in the display apparatus 41 controlled by the presentation control means.
Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 that form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. Further, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the number of starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 in the same lighting manner as the ordinary figure hold indicator 56.

For example, the first gaming state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short time state occurs.
The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example. If the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 3), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure change display game is the normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is (Priority) to be executed.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (start winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121a in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, power failure monitoring circuit and initialization switch, and the occurrence and recovery of power failure in game control device 100 A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal to be notified is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.
The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special results is different (expected values are different) as reach effects: normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach) Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like is also input to the third input port 124. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 170. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 through the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured as follows. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 includes a first output port 131 that is connected to the data bus 140 and generates a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. The output unit 130 is provided with a buffer 132. This buffer 132 is arranged on the data communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300, and prevents the signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side, that is, one-way. This is to secure communication. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 170 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability of jackpot, etc. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 171. The external information terminal 171 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device.
Further, in this embodiment, a signal for setting the hitting ball launching device (not shown) to be in a firing prohibited state is output from the fifth output port 137 and supplied to the hitting ball launching device via the payout control device 200. Has been.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 171. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 171 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 170 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. The sound source LSI 314 for controlling the sound output is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and a sound ROM 324 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the special figure reservation number command, the special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals. . Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the front frame 12. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41), a motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, the moving device) A frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling the frame effect device 45 such as a motor that operates the light 16 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 that drive and control the lamp, motor, solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a signal from the brightness sensor 20 provided on the front right side of the glass frame 15, an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12, and the above panel. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) receives the detection signal of the on / off state of the effect actor switch 44a for detecting the initial position of the motor in the effect device 44 and the signal from the non-contact sensor 47 provided on the right side of the center case 40. ) A switch input circuit 336 for inputting to 311, an amplifier circuit 337 a including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the front frame 12, and an amplifier circuit 337 b for driving the speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 are provided. It has been. Among these, the detection signal of the effect button switch 25a includes a push button detection signal, a select button detection signal, and a touch sensor detection signal.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize opening solenoid 39b. The members 39c and 39c are opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs.
Next, a process of outputting a firing prohibition signal to the ball striking device (step S4), a process of reading the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (step S5), and an interrupt mode setting for setting an interrupt processing mode Processing (step S6) is performed.

  Thereafter, processing for setting a power supply delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch is reliably detected by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. it can. In other words, if the status of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch can be operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch can be operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Yes), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). And when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S10; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (step S10; Yes), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is awaited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; No), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; No), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the timer value is 0 (step S12; Yes), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).
Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300) is set (step S15), and the first input port read first It is determined from the state of 122 whether the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 has been turned on (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is off (step S16; No), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). S17; Yes), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Yes), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Yes), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Yes), or when the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; No or step S18; No). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; No), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 6 and the RAM access-prohibited area is set to access-permitted, and then all RAM areas are initialized. (Clear to 0) is performed (step S27). Then, after setting the RAM access-prohibited area to be access-prohibited (step S28), a process of saving the initial value at the time of RAM initialization to the area to be initialized (step S29) is performed. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.

  The RAM 111C indicates whether there is a readable random number in the latch register of the random number generation circuit 210 (see FIG. 104) not only when the power is turned on (including when the power failure is restored) but also when the initialization switch is turned on. The latch circuit error flag is cleared. This prevents the CPU from reading the value of the latch register before the random number updated in the random number generation circuit 210 is latched in the latch register when the power is turned on or the initialization switch is turned on. . The latch circuit error flag is a latch data flag indicating whether or not the random number of the status register is normally latched in the latch register and the random number can be read in the special figure start port switch common processing (FIG. 14) described later. With reference to this, when it is determined that there is no random number, it is set to “1” (with an error), and a plurality of latch registers are provided correspondingly.

On the other hand, in step S21 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are areas related to a power failure recovery inspection area, a checksum area, and error fraud monitoring.
Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the probability is not high (step S22; No), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, if the probability is high (step S22; Yes), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 (step S25), and it progresses to step S31.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S25 and the power-on command transmitted in step S30 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a decorative feature indicating the number of holds in FIGS. 1 includes a hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit 233 that generates a timer interrupt signal in the clock generator 230 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is performed.
After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, taking the case of using a 16-bit variable length random number circuit 211 described later as an example, a maximum value setting register 211A, a latch permission prohibiting register 211C, a latch mode register 211E, and a latch logic selection register 215 are included. A process for setting the operation of the random number circuit 211 is performed.
The CPU 111A sets the maximum value to a predetermined register (maximum value setting register 211A) in the random number generation circuit, and generation of random numbers is started in response to the highest byte of the maximum value being set by the user program. It has become so.

Thereafter, the value of the soft random number register at the time of power-on is extracted, saved as an initial value random number (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers. Moreover, when the interruption is permitted in step S34, the launch of the hitting ball launching device is permitted.
In addition, you may make it perform the setting which permits discharge | release of a hit ball | bowl launcher by the output process (step S103) in a timer interruption process (FIG. 10).

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the variation pattern random number, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the big hit random number (common figure) are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured.
After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times of checking and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S37). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Yes), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Yes), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S18 and S41) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; No), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Yes), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step S61). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to capture signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 The magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave, and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 are performed. . Then, external information editing processing (step S113) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S114), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S115), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S115) Step S116) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. . Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (step S150), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken, and saved as a rising edge (step S155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). In step S164, the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step S167).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 171 is loaded and synthesized, and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 170 that outputs the test signal to the test board is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 170 (Step S169). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 170 that outputs the test signal to the test board is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 170. (Step S170).

  Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 170 that outputs the test signal to the test board is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 170 (Step S171). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 170 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 170 ( Step S172). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 170 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 170. (Step S173) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, a check is made among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the targeted winning number counter area (step S181). If there is no count number (step S181; No), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Yes), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; No), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Yes), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the winning number counter area A payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the data reading is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S186), and is acquired in step S185. The payout command (negative logic data) and the off-state (low level) strobe signal are output to the port 131 (see FIG. 3) (step S187).

  Thereafter, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (step S188), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S186 has elapsed (step S189). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S189; No), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S187. When the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S189; Yes), that is, when the off time has elapsed, a negative logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time of negative logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) is set. Setting is made (step S190).

  Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S191). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by −1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has expired ( Step S193). When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S193; No), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S191. When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S193; Yes), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data has ended, the negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is inverted. Data is generated (step S194).

  Next, a strobe on remaining timer for measuring the remaining strobe signal on time (high level time, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S195), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S194 is set. The strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 131 (step S196). Thereafter, the remaining strobe-on timer is updated by -1 (step S197), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining strobe-on timer is 0, that is, whether the on-time set in step S195 has expired (step S198). If the value of the remaining strobe on timer is not 0 (step S198; No), that is, if the on-time has not expired, the process returns to step S196. Further, when the value of the remaining strobe on timer is 0 (step S198; Yes), that is, when the on-time has expired, a positive logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of the positive logic data. Is set (step S199).

  Thereafter, a payout command (positive logic data) is output, and an off state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S200). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S201), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S199 has ended (step S201). Step S202). If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S202; No), that is, if the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S200. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S202; Yes), that is, when it is finished, information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. The main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) is performed, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. By making a request to the game control apparatus 100, it becomes possible to receive an accurate command.

[Main prize ball remaining number update processing]
Next, details of the main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) in the above-described payout command transmission process will be described. In this main award ball remaining number update process, a main award ball signal to be output to an external device is set every time the number of award balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). To do. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external apparatus outputs a prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the main winning ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the remaining winning ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S211). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. In this process, the value of the remaining prize ball area is stored. The value of a positive logic payout command is added as the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S212).

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S213), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S214; No), the main prize ball remaining number update process is terminated. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214; Yes), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by 1 (step S215), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S215). S216), the process returns to step S213.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; No), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Yes), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal figure is next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; No), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Yes), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

  When the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; No), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Yes), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Yes), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; No), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Yes), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; No), “0” is set as the upper byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower byte of the random value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; No), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Yes), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244), and this value is set to 1. Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; No), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Yes), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). In this winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, a detection signal from a count switch) corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38). (The data indicating the number of the input port, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc. is stored) is prepared (step S301). Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (the first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and normal. A fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S305), and an illegal winning is monitored and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (start opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S307), and the illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). Thereafter, according to the value of the error scan counter, any one of the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, the chute ball switch signal from the dispensing control device 200, the overflow switch signal, and the dispensing abnormality status signal The gaming machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the target is prepared (step S312). Then, an error check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314; Yes), the winning prize switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no error monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is not 3 (step S314; No), the glass frame open detection switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64, the disconnection of the connector of the switch, etc. are generated according to the value of the error scan counter. A gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the output abnormality detection signals 2 is prepared (step S315). Then, an error check process (step S316) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed, and the winning opening switch / error monitoring process ends.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; No), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Yes), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).
The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S325; No), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Yes), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; No), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; No), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Yes), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; No), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Yes), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraud winning release flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Yes), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; No), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Yes), the fraud & winning prize monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; No), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 20 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input (step S352; No), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357). If there is an input (step S352; Yes), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S352). S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; No), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (step S356), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357). If an overflow has occurred (step S355; Yes), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S357; No), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S357; Yes), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 21 shows the command setting process (step S342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

  When the command is being transmitted (step S363; Yes), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; No), the transmission circuit is initialized (step S364) because the circuit may be abnormal, and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S365), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

  Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Yes), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; No), the transmission circuit is initialized because the circuit may be abnormal (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
FIG. 22 shows the error check process (steps S313 and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. In this error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to the error scan counter is acquired (step S381), and it is determined whether the switch (including the signal) to be monitored is on, that is, whether it is in a state indicating an error. Determination is made (step S382).

  If the switch is not on (step S382; No), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S383), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S384). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S385), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  On the other hand, if the switch is on (step S382; Yes), an error occurrence flag is prepared as an error flag (step S386), and a target error notification command is prepared (step S387). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S388), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  If the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (step S389; Yes), that is, if the switch state has not changed, the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S392). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393). If the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (step S389; No), that is, if the switch state changes, the current switch state is saved in the target switch control area ( In step S390), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S391), the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S392), and the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value. Is determined (step S393).

  If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393; No), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393; Yes), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step S394). The error flag is compared with the value in the target error flag area (step S395).

  If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step S395; Yes), the error check process ends. If the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (step S395; No), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S396), and command setting processing is performed. (Step S397), the error check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4). If the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4; Yes), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game process number referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed.

  In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a big prize winning ball remaining ball process A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A17) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure game process timer is not 0 at step A4 (step A4; No), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A114).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A114 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A114; No), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), The starting port switch common process (step A116) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission fraud is occurring (step A114; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A201). If there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; No), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; Yes), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; No), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Yes), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal that is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; No), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Yes), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A209). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (step A209; Yes), the special figure hold number to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by 1 (step A212), and is monitored The decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figure corresponding to the monitoring start switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (step A209; No), a special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A210), and command setting processing (step A211) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied (step A231). If not satisfied (step A231; No), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A231; Yes), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.
Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, when the open extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, This is a case where it is not in a state, and a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied (step A231; Yes), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A232) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Yes), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. A pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; No), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step A237).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and command setting processing is performed (step A239). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A240) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step A240). A241), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and command setting processing is performed ( Step A244), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, is the special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) being open, that is, in a special gaming state? Is determined (step A251). If the special winning opening is not open (step A251; No), the special winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. If the big prize opening is open (step A251; Yes), 0 is set to the prize counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether the first special variation winning device 38 is in a special gaming state (Step A253).

  When the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A253; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step A254). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Yes), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A254; No), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a) (step A255).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; No), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). When there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 1 (step A255; Yes), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and the lower prize winning count command is prepared (step A257). Then, a command setting process (step A258) is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

  If there is no input to the lower prize winning switch 2 (step A259; No), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 2 (step A259; Yes), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and a lower prize winning count command is prepared (step A261). Then, command setting processing (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

  On the other hand, when the lower university winning opening is not open (step A253; No), that is, the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is open (special game for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; No), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A264).

  When it is not in the process of remaining the winning prize remaining ball (step A264; No), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step A266). In addition, when the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264; Yes), an upper winning ball count command is prepared (step A266). Thereafter, command setting processing (step A267) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Yes), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; No), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning mouth counts (step A269), and the number of large winning mouth counts is the upper limit value (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of possible game balls has been exceeded (step A270).

  When the number of winning prizes count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; No), the winning prize port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step A270; Yes), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step A274), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17 and A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 28, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. Is checked (step A281).

  When the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Yes), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; No), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A288). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Yes), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; No), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A289). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step A306; Yes), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A311; No) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), a command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already been started at step A311 (step A311; Yes), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 29, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 in step A301 (step A301; No), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after the -1 update is prepared ( Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; No), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after the -1 update is prepared (step A307). Then, command setting processing (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps A307 and A302), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 39) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Step A441).

  In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 31, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A342). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A343) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is a big hit (step A344; Yes), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is not a big hit (step A344; No), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the deviation information to the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 33 shows the big hit determination process (step A343) in the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Yes), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; No), it is determined whether the probability state is high (step A353).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A353; Yes), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If not in the high probability state (step A353; No), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Yes), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; No), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A358), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A368), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step A369). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step A361; No), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A370). A371), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A373), and command setting processing (step A374) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (step A381). If it is not in the special drawing time (step A381; No), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step A382). If the special drawing time is short (step A381; Yes), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A383).

  Then, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded (step A384), the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). . Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; No), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A394). If the stop symbol pattern is not a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A394; No) ) Loads the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepares it (step A397).

On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Yes), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A394; Yes), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step A392. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A397).
When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step A400). Then, a sorting process (step A401) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A403), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A406). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 37 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step A398) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A412; Yes), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A417) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; No), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A413).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A413 from the random value loaded in Step A397 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A414). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A415; No), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process proceeds to step A413, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step A413, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random value as the new random value in step A415, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Yes). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Yes), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 38 shows the distribution process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A421). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A422; Yes), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A427), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; No), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A423).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A423 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in Step A400 or A406, a new random value is calculated ( In step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A425; No), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process shifts to step A423, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step A423, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A425. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Yes). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Yes), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A427), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A435).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A436), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A438), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A439), and command setting processing is performed (step A440). . Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step A443), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (Step A444).

  Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). Then, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; Yes), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Yes), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. In (Step A448; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (Step A449).

  If the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; No), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). A command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure high probability is present (step A449; Yes), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S451). A452), a command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the change start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; No), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; No), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; No) ends the change start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.
As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 35) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step A465). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step A466, FIG. 36) for setting a variation pattern for the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information for the second special figure variation display game. (See Step A467, FIG. 39), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 32 is performed for the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A471). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A472). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 33) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is a big hit (step A474; Yes), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is not a big hit (step A474; No), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481; Yes), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Furthermore, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A488), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A489). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step A481; No), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A490). A491), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A493), and command setting processing (step A494) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 43 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 44 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). When there is no stop extension information (step A601; No), the special special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606). To complete the special figure display process.

  If there is stop extension information (step A601; Yes), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). When it is the stop extension information 1 (step A603; Yes), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not stop extension information 1 (step A603; No), that is, if it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605), The special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A606) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613, A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output is determined in the external information terminal. A control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the count signal control timer area (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the RWM big hit flag 2 is loaded. A process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623; Yes), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A628), and the second feature. A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A623; No), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A626), and if it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step A626; Yes), the big hit (the special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A test signal related to the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and a command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and a command setting process ( Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638). )I do.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A640). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is cleared (step A641), and the special winning opening is opened. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step A642).

  Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A644). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit at step A626 in FIG. 47 (step A626; No), the special mode variation display for setting the short time state is performed by performing the production mode information check processing (step A646) regarding the setting of the production mode. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A647) for managing the number of game executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A648, see FIG. 30) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A651) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). . Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), and the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A656). Save the low probability of ordinary figure & no ordinary power support flag in the flag area (step A657).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A659), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A662). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671; Yes), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A671; No), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A673). When the production remaining speed becomes 0 (step A673; Yes), that is, when the production mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step A675).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S676). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), command setting processing (step A681) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step A673; No), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether there is any (step A682). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; No), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Yes), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), command setting processing (step A684) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step A647) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is being reached (step A691). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A691; Yes), the time shortening variation frequency update process is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A691; No), it is determined whether the special figure is short (short time state) (step A692).

  If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A692; No), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. If the special drawing time is short (step A692; Yes), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time shortening variation number is not 0 (step A694; No), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated. If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A694; Yes), that is, if the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A695), Command setting processing (step A696) is performed. After that, special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 51 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step A697) in the above-described time-reduced variation frequency update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction), first, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

  Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A704). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A706). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

  Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing patterns of the special prize opening (special variable prize device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. . One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 52 shows an open / close pattern of the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of derivation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but has an ending time of 1400 ms. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 52 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and it is difficult to recognize which opening / closing pattern the player has as the same effect on the display device 41 or the like. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 53 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower grand prize opening (the first special variable winning device 38). The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 53A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 3 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results which are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the open / close pattern is 1 to 3 (step A752).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; Yes), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) is set (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; No), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and the command setting process (Step A754) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755). If it is the first round (step A755; Yes), the big prize opening information is the lower special prize opening (first special prize) It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 38) is an open / close pattern (step A756). When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A756; Yes), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; No), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Yes), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG. Further, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; No), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step A761), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; No), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 round (step A762), and the started round is 2 to 11 When it is a round (step A762; Yes), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A763). If the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A763; No), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step S763). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; Yes), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; No), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the special prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A766; Yes), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper prize opening / closing pattern are set (step A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766; No), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

  When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Yes), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the big prize opening information is not the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; No), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and later of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step A769) and the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  55, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer area (step A770), and the end value (E) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer upper limit area. Save (Step A771). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773).

  When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773; Yes), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A773; No), the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A775), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. One of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is set by the above processing.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), opening / closing time value is acquired and special figure game process timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. To do. With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A774). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step A794). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A775). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 801), and the processing number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A802). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and information in the big winning count area storing the number of winning prizes in the big winning prize is cleared (step A804). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step A805), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A811). Step A812).

  When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; No), solenoid information setting processing (step A819, see FIG. 56) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, a process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed 3 (step A820), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A842), and finish the process transition setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening.

  Returning to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; Yes), the big prize opening information is the upper big prize opening short opening pattern (upper big prize opening release pattern 1). -3) is determined (step A813). When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; Yes), the big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the process for opening the big prize opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; No), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM, Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; No), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), command setting processing (step A817) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting processing ( Step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated. If it is the final round (step A814; Yes), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step A816), and the command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In this special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, off data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 38b or 39b is used as the large winning port solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (step A834), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A851; No), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A852). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A851; Yes), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A856) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball The process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms, including 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A861), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A861). A862).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is opened. A signal relating to the end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A856) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is ended. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A875), and the information on the number-of-rounds area storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step A880). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special game state is set to a high probability after the special game state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

  If it is not high probability data (step A901; No), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Yes), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and a command setting process (step A905) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A907). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A908), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).
Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and command setting processing (step A912) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.
That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is a short time number. Is saved (step A947). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A948), and a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A949). The normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.
As shown in FIG. 69, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; Yes), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed. In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure. If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B16) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; No), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Yes), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step B102).

When the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (step B102; Yes), the number of reserved drawings is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; No), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; No). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B121). Then, when it is normal (step B121; Yes), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Yes). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B124; Yes). Then, the pointer (the value at which the hit ends) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B126), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the map is not being hit (step B121; No), when it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; No), or step B124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B124; No), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131). If the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131; Yes), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. In addition, when the number of pending maps is not 0 (step B131; No), a random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area (for pending number 1) in the RWM (step B132), and the usual map change display game is executed. It is determined whether the probability of the hit result is a normal high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether the time is short (step B133).

  If it is not at the time of normal probability (step B133; No), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of normal probability (step B134). If the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B134; No), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B135). B136), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Yes), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B149).

  In step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Yes), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is the lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the high probability of the normal diagram. It is determined whether it is less than the value (step B137), and if the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; No), a plurality of consecutive determinations used when the value of the hit random number is normally high It is determined whether the value is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value (step B138).

  If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B138; No), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139). A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value at Step B137 (Step B137; Yes), or when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value at Step B138 (Step B138; Yes). ), That is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the usual figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per ordinary figure (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the number of reserved customs 4 in the random number storage area per number of commons is cleared, and the number of reserved normals is decremented (−1).

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B148). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step B148; No), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds). ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B148; Yes), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B150). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition process 1]
FIG. 73 shows the normal daily process transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the above normal normal process. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B161). B162). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 74 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B171). Step B172). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B175), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the normal map changing process, a general map display process transition setting process (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the normal map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B181). Is saved in the usual game process number area (step B182). After that, a general map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that is a display time of the result of the general map change display game on the general map display is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is set as the general game display process. Save in the timer area (step B184). Further, a signal related to the end of the normal change is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped is saved in the normal change control flag area ( In step B186), the normal diagram display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B203).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B203; No), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power transmission is being supported (during the time reduction state) (step B204).

  If the normal power support is not being performed (step B204; No), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B205). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the upper limit area of control pointer per figure (step B207). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary power support is in progress (step B204; Yes), the ordinary power release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the ordinary power support is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 77 shows a process transition setting process (step B211) during the normal map in the above-described normal map display process. In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B221), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B222). After that, a signal related to the hitting of the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the general electric signal is output to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid. On data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B226). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is controlled during the normal map control. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value area (the value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area for the control pointer during the normal map (step B302; No), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B303), A general electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B302; Yes), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B303. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal hit process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-described normal process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after closing (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B312), and the off data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B313), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1, 4, 6, or 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. On data is set in the data area (step B315), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the process goes to step B316 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). Then, “4” is set as the process number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B317), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B318). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B319), and the general electric operation transition setting process is ended.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the universal chart end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal chart end process is set (step B401), and the process number is set to the regular game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data region (step B404). The normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to 37 is cleared (step B405). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the normal control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the normal figure end process transition setting process ends.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).
Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and a flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is monitored. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and the usual process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which a display mode on the general map hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is displayed. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the usual figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the container (step S504).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (step S506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit ( Step S508).

  Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. Are saved in the segment area of each game state display section (step S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step S511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Yes), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process ends. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; No), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. To do.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.
As shown in FIG. 83, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Yes), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step S603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Yes), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; No), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608) and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. Is updated by -1 if the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; No), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; No), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Yes), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, or the fraud notification has been received from the beginning. If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Yes), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the values do not match (step S613; No), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.
As shown in FIG. 84, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a, the radio wave is monitored. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Yes), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; No), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, if the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, −1 is updated (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; No), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706; Yes), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the period of the unauthorized notification ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step S707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709).

  If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step S709; Yes), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; No), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S104), the prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112). Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the external information editing process, first, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal for editing a winning opening winning signal. Edit processing (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804; Yes), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S805). On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (step S804; No), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, first, a security signal for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; No), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error status signal Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Yes), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (step S809; Yes), and the front frame An open error is occurring (step S810; Yes), a lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step S811; Yes), an upper winning prize fraud is occurring (step S812; Yes), and a power transmission fraud is occurring (step S813; Yes) ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Yes) or the radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Yes), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819). , To end the external information editing process. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Yes) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; No), off-data of the security signal is used as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Yes), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step S823; No), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area outputs the main prize ball signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step S823; Yes), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S823). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; No), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826; Yes), the process proceeds to step S827. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S826; No), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Yes), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step S833; No), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833; Yes), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; No), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Yes), the process proceeds to step S837. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; No), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  The gaming machine as described above has a main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and a slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Device 300, etc.), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and waits for the activation of the slave control device when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. And a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Therefore, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of power-on.
Moreover, the power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices of the gaming machine 10 is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected. The apparatus 100) determines that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at power-on.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. Initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the waiting time.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the initialization operation unit. In other words, when the status of the initialization operation unit is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization operation unit is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization operation unit is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
Therefore, since access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the standby time has elapsed, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, and the control burden can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a block diagram showing a more specific configuration of the gaming microcomputer 111 constituting the gaming control apparatus 100. As shown in FIG. Conventional gaming microcomputers generally have a random number generation circuit configured and connected as an external circuit, whereas the gaming microcomputer of this embodiment incorporates a random number generation circuit.
The gaming microcomputer 111 of this embodiment is divided into a game control block 110A for performing game control and a management block 110B for managing information, and one element constituting each circuit block described below is provided on a semiconductor substrate. It is formed as a semiconductor integrated circuit (amusement chip).

  The game control block 110A includes a CPU core 111A, a program ROM 111B, a work RAM 111C, an external bus interface 141, a bus switching circuit 142, a decryption / ROM writing circuit 143, a user ID memory 144, a reset / interrupt controller for performing reset and interrupt control. 145, a boot block 147, an address decoder 148, an output control circuit 149, a clock generator 230, a random number generation circuit 210, and other functional blocks. These functional blocks and the management block 110B are connected by a CPU bus 153.

  The CPU core 111A includes various registers such as an accumulator, an arithmetic / logic unit (ALU), an instruction register (IR), a decoder, a program counter (PC), a stack pointer (SP), a data bus connecting them, an address bus, and various controls. For example, a Z80 architecture. The CPU core 111A implements various functions necessary for controlling the gaming machine 10 in software by loading and executing a game control program stored in the program ROM 111B. The program ROM 111B stores a user program and is composed of an electrically writable EEPROM, flash memory, or the like. In this embodiment, parameters (hardware parameters) specific to the user system (hardware) are stored in the memory. Has also been made storable.

  The work RAM 111C corresponds to the main memory of the CPU core 111A, and is composed of, for example, a high-speed semiconductor device such as an S-RAM. The work RAM 111C is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program in the game block 110A. The work RAM 111C can be provided with a battery backup function using a dedicated terminal assigned to one of the terminal groups of the gaming microcomputer 111, and its stored contents even after the gaming machine 10 is powered off. Hold. In addition, the work RAM 111C is controlled by a protection circuit (not shown) for prohibition and permission of the chip enable. During chip enable prohibition (when power is not supplied to the gaming machine 10), reading and writing are performed. None of this can be done.

  The external bus interface 141 is a circuit for performing input / output control of various signals such as a memory request signal MREQ, an input / output request signal IREQ, a memory write signal WR, and a memory read signal RD with an external device. The bus switching circuit 142 is a circuit for switching the bus to enable input / output of address signals A0 to A15 and data signals D0 to D7 between an external bus (not shown) and the CPU bus 153 in the chip. . For example, when the memory write signal WR is activated while the memory request signal MREQ or the input / output request signal IREQ is activated, an external data signal can be written to a predetermined external I / O, and the memory read signal RD is activated. Then, an external data signal can be taken in from a predetermined external I / O.

  The decryption / ROM writing circuit 143 is a circuit for decrypting data sent after being encrypted, generating a voltage necessary for writing to the electrically programmable program ROM 111B, and controlling timing. . For example, when an external data signal is given from the outside while sequentially incrementing the external address signal while the mode signal MODE is active, it becomes a writing mode to the program ROM 111B and is made by a game machine manufacturer or a third party organization. A game program can be written. However, if the write end code is recorded in a predetermined area of the ROM 111B after the game program has been written to the program ROM 111B, the game program cannot be written to the program ROM 111B thereafter.

The user ID memory 144 is a memory for storing identification information unique to the gaming machine, and is configured by a writable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM or a flash memory, so that the identification information can be read out by a user program. Yes.
The reset / interrupt control circuit (reset / interrupt controller) 145 makes an interrupt request to the CPU core 111A in response to an interrupt request signal from the outside, or to a circuit (for example, a random number generation circuit) inside the chip. For example, when signals DET0 and DET1 from the start winning detection switches 36a and 37a are input to the interrupt terminal, a random number acquisition process is executed using this as a trigger.

The reset / interrupt control circuit 145 can receive a signal from an interrupt terminal NMI to which an interrupt signal that cannot be masked is input, and a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply apparatus 400 is input to this terminal. The power failure detection signal from is input.
In addition, the reset / interrupt control circuit 145 performs system reset of the CPU core 111A in response to a reset signal externally input to the reset terminal RST, and initializes various resources and peripheral devices inside the gaming microcomputer 111. Generate a signal to set the state. The reset / interrupt control circuit 145 has a built-in random delay circuit 146, which randomly delays a signal input to the reset terminal RST and outputs the signal to the outside from the reset output terminal XRST, for example, an input / output port IC By shifting the timing of resetting peripheral devices, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze illegal programs and perform illegal activities.

  The boot block 147 includes a ROM for storing a boot program. When the system of the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset, the boot program starts up and performs a predetermined simple check. If the boot ROM is normal, the protection setting process is executed, and then the process is passed to a predetermined address of the game program (a predetermined address in the address space of the CPU 111A (generally, the first address in the address space 0000h)).

  The address decoder 148 decodes the address information of the CPU bus 153, controls the output control circuit 149 according to the decoding result, and outputs the chip selection signals CS0 to CS15 to the outside. The output control circuit 149 includes solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3) for opening and closing the large winning opening (38, 39) and a solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37. A PWM circuit that is driven by a PWM (pulse width modulation) method is provided.

Whether to use the function of the PWM circuit or the chip select signal can be set by a hardware parameter (HW parameter) in the program ROM 111B. When the HW parameter is set to use the function of the PWM circuit, the solenoid drive signals PWM0 to PWM2 are output from the terminals for outputting CS13 to CS15 of the chip select signals CS0 to CS15. . The outputs of PWM0 to PWM2 can be set individually. Further, after the PWM circuit is started, the duty and cycle can be changed but cannot be stopped.
Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 of this embodiment has a function of generating a WDT (watchdog timer) reset by software. When a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the PWM circuit is initialized and the output is stopped. It is supposed to be.

Based on the system clock signal CLK supplied from the oscillation circuit 113, the clock generator 230 operates with an operation clock supplied to each block in the gaming microcomputer 111 including the CPU core 111A or a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds). A timer interrupt clock is generated, and a random number update clock in the random number generation circuit 210 is generated based on the clock signal EXCLK supplied from the oscillation circuit 113 separately from the system clock CLK. The clock generator 230 can also generate a random number update clock in the random number generation circuit based on the clock signal CLK supplied from the oscillation circuit 113.
The system clock signal CLK and the external clock signal EXCLK input to the clock generator 230 can be selected, and unused clock terminals that are not input with the clock signal are pulled up or pulled down to a constant voltage. When the external clock is selected, if there is no clock input to the external clock input terminal EXCLK during the system reset period, an error state occurs and the CPU does not start up.

  The random number generation circuit 210 is a circuit for generating a random number used for jackpot determination and the like, and in the conventional gaming microcomputer, what is configured as an external circuit is incorporated, and a specific function is added. It is a thing. In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit 210 includes a first random number generation circuit that generates a big hit symbol random number for determining a stop symbol when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and a special figure fluctuation. And a second random number generation circuit for generating a big hit random number for determining whether or not the result of the display game is a big hit. These random number generation circuits will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  The management block 110B includes a management program ROM 161, a management work RAM 162, a bus monitor circuit 163, a management ID memory 164, a management control circuit 165, an external communication control circuit 166, and a local bus 167 that connects these circuit blocks. In addition, the bus monitor circuit 163 is connected to both the local bus 167 and the CPU bus 153 of the game control block 110A so that data can be transmitted to and received from the CPU core 111A via the CPU bus 153. Has been.

  The management work RAM 162 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing information of the game control block 110A read via the bus monitor circuit 163. The bus monitor circuit 163 monitors the state of the CPU bus 153. When the CPU bus 153 is not used by the CPU core 111A, the program ROM 111B and the user work of the game control block 110A are connected via the CPU bus 153 as necessary. The RAM 111C and the like are accessed, and necessary data (game program, contents of the user work RAM 111C, etc.) are taken into the management block 110B.

  In the management ID memory 164, a unique ID used for identification of the gaming microcomputer 111 and determination of legitimacy is written, and this unique ID is played through the bus 167 and the external communication control circuit 166. It can be read by a management device (hall computer) outside the machine. This allows the management device to monitor the unique ID of the gaming machine. Specifically, if the unique ID set in advance in the gaming machine does not match the unique ID read by the management device, the management device disables input / output of various signals. Then, it becomes impossible to input / output signals between the various devices connected to the game control device 100 (for example, the big winning opening solenoid 58b and the normal variation winning opening solenoid 57c) and the subordinate control device and the CPU core 111. However, it becomes clear that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine due to the fact that the player cannot operate or the decorative lamp does not light.

  In addition to the unique ID, information such as a game type code, a rank code, a manufacturer number, a model code, and an inspection number is written in the management ID memory 164. The game type code is information for distinguishing pachinko gaming machines, throttle machines, and the like, and is represented by, for example, “P” for pachinko gaming machines and “G” for throttle machines. The rank code is a model rank code of the gaming machine 1 (a code for distinguishing between the first type and the second type), a manufacturer number, or a manufacturer ID (or manufacturer code) for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. is there. The model code is a product code of the gaming machine 1 set by the manufacturer. The inspection number (or verification code) is a number given to the gaming machine 1 that has passed the inspection by the third party organization.

Further, the management ID memory 164 includes a ROM and a RAM, and the contents of the ROM are copied to the RAM. That is, the unique ID, game type code, rank code, manufacturer number, model code, and inspection number are stored in the ROM, and are copied to the RAM. The copy timing is performed when the gaming machine is turned on or when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset, for example, in an initialization process executed by the management block 110B immediately after the system reset.
Unlike the above-described user ID memory, the management ID cannot be read by the user program.

  The HPG control circuit 165 controls the operation of the management block 110B and has a buffer memory. For example, the HPG control circuit 165 monitors the operation of the CPU core 111A via the bus monitor circuit 163, and copies the contents stored in the user work RAM 111C of the game block 110A to the mirrored RAM 144 during non-operation. Further, the contents of the management ID memory 164 of the management block 110B are transferred to the outside in response to a request from the inspection apparatus, or the program in the user program ROM 111B is externally transferred via the bus monitor circuit 163 in response to a program request. Or transfer to. The buffer memory is used for timing adjustment at the time of transfer.

  The external communication control circuit 166 communicates with an information collection terminal device and an ID inspection device provided outside the gaming machine. For example, when an information collection terminal device is connected, in response to a request from the information collection terminal device, the storage contents of the management work RAM 162 and the management ID memory 164 are transferred to the requesting information collection terminal device. If an ID inspection device is connected, at least information on the unique ID stored in the management ID memory 164 is transferred to the requesting ID inspection device in response to a request from the ID inspection device. .

By the way, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can arrange the I / O port in the memory space or the I / O space by setting the hardware parameter of the CPU. The bus 140 can be used in a time-sharing manner as a bus for transmitting the address signals A8 to A15 or a bus for transmitting the data signals D0 to D7. Also, the I / O area in the memory space can be expanded by connecting an I / O expansion chip or decoder that takes in the data signal on the bus and generates a chip selection signal. Yes.
Further, in this embodiment, the resistor of the signal line is connected as a resistor (pull-up resistor / pull-down resistor) that is connected to a signal line for transmitting a signal and applies a voltage level (power supply voltage or ground potential) according to the output. A composite resistor devised so that the potential can be stabilized is used. The composite resistor will be described in detail later.

First, a specific embodiment of the game control device (main board) 100 configured to expand an I / O area in a memory space by connecting an I / O expansion chip will be described.
FIG. 89 shows components such as a detection switch and a solenoid on the main board 100 as a game control device on which an I / O expansion chip is mounted, and an IC and I / O expansion constituting a microcomputer chip (CPU) 111A and an input port. The circuit diagram which showed one Example of the connection method with the composite type | mold resistor which comprises a chip | tip and a pull-up resistor is shown.

89, reference numeral 431 denotes a power failure monitoring circuit that is provided in the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 of FIG. 3 and monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410. The power failure monitoring circuit 431 detects the occurrence of a power failure and outputs a power failure detection signal PFD when a voltage of 32 V falls below a predetermined voltage, and outputs a reset signal RST after a predetermined time. The power failure detection signal PFD is input as an interrupt signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU 111A.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 431 functions as a power failure detection signal output unit and a reset signal output unit.
In this embodiment, the power failure detection signal is input to the input port as shown in FIG. 3, but the power failure detection signal may be input to the NMI terminal as shown in FIG. Good.

In FIG. 89, reference numeral 113 denotes an oscillation circuit provided in the game control device (main board) 100, and the clock signal CLK generated by the oscillation circuit 113 is an operation clock of the CPU. The random number circuit updates the random number based on the reference clock, and is input to the clock terminal CLK of the CPU 111A as the reference clock.
In addition to the clock signal CLK, a clock signal EXCLK used for random number update may be supplied to the CPU 111A.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the oscillation circuit 113 functions as a clock signal output unit.

Further, in FIG. 89, reference numeral 121 denotes a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F, SW driver IC) to which detection signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input. ).
In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 431, the oscillation circuit 113, and the proximity I / F (SW driver IC) 121 are configured to output signals by an open collector method, and therefore signals from these circuits are output. Are connected to signal lines L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5, which are wiring patterns on the printed circuit board, and are configured to function as pull-up resistors, respectively. .
Specifically, the composite resistor 70a is connected to the signal lines L1, L2, and L3 that transmit the reset signal RST and the power failure detection signal PFD output from the power failure monitoring circuit 431 and the clock signal CLK output from the oscillation circuit 113. Is connected as a pull-up resistor. A composite resistor 70b is connected as a pull-up resistor to the signal lines L4 and L5 that transmit the winning detection signals DET0 and DET1 output from the proximity I / F (SW driver IC) 121.

  Similarly, the CPU 111A is also configured to output the chip selection signal CSi and the address signal Ai for selecting the input port IC 122 and the output ports 135 and 136 by an open collector method. Compound resistors 70c are provided in signal lines L11 to L14 for transmitting address signals A0 to A3, and are configured to function as pull-up resistors, respectively. The signal lines L6, L7, L8, and L9 that transmit the chip selection signals CS1, CS2, CS3, and CS11 output from the CPU 111A are connected to the signal lines L4 and L5 that transmit the start winning detection signal. Connection is made to use the resistance in 70b.

FIG. 90 shows an equivalent circuit of the composite resistors 70a and 70b. Among these, (A) is an equivalent circuit of the composite resistor 70a, and (B) is an equivalent circuit of the composite resistor 70b.
As can be seen from FIG. 90, the composite resistor 70 of this embodiment includes a plurality of resistance elements each having an equal resistance value R and external terminals R1, R2,... Connected to one terminal of these resistance elements. ... provided with Rn and a common terminal COM, the other terminal of each resistance element is connected to the common node Nc, and the common node Nc is connected to the common terminal COM.

  In this embodiment, when used as a pull-up resistor, the power supply voltage Vcc (5 V) is applied to the common terminal COM of the composite resistors 70a and 70b, and when used as a pull-down resistor, the composite resistor Connection is made such that the ground potential GND (0 V) is applied to the common terminals COM of 70a and 70b. As shown in FIG. 89, at least one of the external terminals R1, R2,... Rn is an unconnected terminal that is not connected to a signal line that transmits a signal, and the unconnected terminal is connected to the common terminal COM. A power supply voltage Vcc (5 V) or a ground potential GND (0 V) that is the same potential as the applied potential is applied. As a result, even if the common terminal COM causes a contact failure and the applied potential becomes unstable, the potential applied to the unconnected terminal is transmitted to the common node Nc, and the potential of the node is stabilized. The potential of the signal line also changes to a desired potential according to the output state of the output side circuit, and it is possible to prevent the reception side circuit from making an erroneous signal determination.

  Furthermore, in the game control device (main board) 100 of the embodiment of FIG. 89, an I / O expansion chip 181 is mounted, and the CPU 111A selects the chip from the I / O expansion chip 181. While the chip selection signal CS11 is supplied, the memory request signal MREQ generated by the CPU 111A indicating that a memory space device is selected, and the input / output request signal IREQ indicating that an I / O space device is selected, Memory write signal WR and memory read signal RD are supplied to I / O expansion chip 181. Further, the reset signal RST generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 431 is also supplied to the I / O expansion chip 181.

Therefore, the compound resistors 70d are connected to the signal lines L22 to L24 that transmit the request signal IREQ (MREQ), the memory write signal WR, and the memory read signal RD to the I / O expansion chip 181 and are respectively pulled. It is configured to function as an up resistor.
Also, a composite resistor 70e is connected to the signal line L31 that transmits a signal (chip selection signal ECS0) output from the I / O expansion chip 181 to the output port IC 132 so as to function as a pull-up resistor. It is configured.
The input port IC 122 and the output ports 135 and 136 are each composed of a buffer, a level shift circuit, and the like.

The I / O expansion chip 181 includes circuits such as an input buffer, an output buffer, a decoder, a selector, and a register. Address input terminals (A0 to A3), input port terminals (P11 to P18), and data output are provided as external terminals. It has terminals (D0 to D7), control signal input terminals (XCS, RST, IREQ, RD, WR), expansion chip selection signal output terminals (ECS0 to ECS15), and power supply terminals (Vcc, GND).
As described above, the I / O expansion chip 181 has a function of expanding the I / O area in the memory space, decodes the address signal (for example, A0 to A3) supplied from the CPU 111A, and The configuration is such that expansion chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 for selecting an expansion I / O device (not shown) can be generated and output.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91A, a common chip selection signal CS11 is output from the CPU 111A in correspondence with the I / O devices arranged at addresses 2B00h to 2B0Fh in the memory space. At the same time, when the CPU 111A outputs the address signals A0 to A3 corresponding to the expansion I / O device on the bus 140, the I / O expansion chip 181 decodes the address signals A0 to A3, and any one of the expansion chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 is decoded. Is output (asserted to low level).
In this specification, the I / O device means a terminal input device such as a switch or a sensor, a terminal output device such as a solenoid, LED, or motor (including a driver), a control device (CPU), and a terminal device. Means an intermediate device such as a buffer, an input port IC, and an output port IC that are arranged between and for relaying signals.
In this embodiment, the expansion chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 generated by the I / O expansion chip 181 are mainly supplied as signals for enabling the operation of the chip to the above-described intermediate device (IC). The

  Further, the I / O expansion chip 181 is provided with input port terminals P11 to P18, and has a function of capturing a signal from a switch (detector) arranged in the expanded I / O area and supplying it to the CPU 111A. The number of switches for inputting detection signals to the CPU 111A can be increased. Then, 2B00h is assigned as an address for enabling this function, and when the extended switch input is selected and the input from the switch is to be taken in, the CPU 111A sends the address signals A0 to A3 on the bus 140 as “ When LLLL ″ is output, the I / O expansion chip 181 enables any of the input buffers provided corresponding to the input port terminals P11 to P18 and outputs the signal input to the selected terminal. It becomes possible to take in the chip.

  However, the I / O expansion chip 181 used in this embodiment cannot output the expansion chip selection signal ECS0 from the I / O expansion chip 181 when the above settings are made. The extended chip selection signals ECS1 to ECS15 can be output at any time. When the I / O expansion chip 181 is set to enable the input port terminals P11 to P18, the I / O expansion chip 181 decodes the data signals D0 to D7 output from the CPU 111A onto the bus 140. Thus, it is possible to select which of the input port terminals P11 to P18 captures the signal.

  In FIG. 89, as an example, the expansion chip selection signal ECS0 output from the I / O expansion chip 181 is input to the clock terminal of the output port IC 132, and the effect control command on the bus 140 is captured in synchronization with ECS0. Thus, there is shown a configuration in which an effect control command is output. Specifically, in order to output the expansion chip selection signal ECS0 from the I / O expansion chip 181, the CPU 111A outputs “LLLL” as the address signals A0 to A3 on the bus 140, and then outputs an effect control command. To do. Then, the expansion chip selection signal ECS0 is asserted to the low level by the I / O expansion chip 181 and the output port IC 132 operates to capture the data signals D0 to D7 (effect control commands) on the bus 140 at that time, Output to the production control device 300.

In FIG. 89, the extended chip selection signal ECS0 is input to the clock terminal of the output port IC 132. However, when the output port IC 132 having the chip enable terminal CE is used, the CE terminal is connected. The extended chip selection signal ECS0 may be input. The same applies to the output port ICs 135, 136 and the like.
In the system of FIG. 89, the reset signal RST generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 431 is input to the reset terminals of the input port IC 122 and the output port ICs 132, 135, and 136 to be reset simultaneously with the CPU 111A. The reset signal XRST generated by randomly delaying the reset signal RST by the CPU 111A may be input to the reset terminal of the input port IC 122 or the output port ICs 132, 135, 136 and reset at a timing different from that of the CPU 111A. Good. Thereby, it is possible to make unauthorized analysis of the system difficult.

Here, the function of the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 used in the present embodiment can arrange the I / O port (I / O device) in the memory space or in the I / O space. It is configured. As shown in FIG. 91, this function is such that I / O ports (I / O devices) arranged at addresses 2A00h to 2B0Fh in the memory space can also be arranged at E0h to FFh in the I / O space. It means that it is configured.
As a result, the user can select a certain I / O device with a memory address or an I / O address on the user program, so that the program can be easily created.

In the game control device (main board) 100 of FIG. 89, the circuit configuration in the case of expanding the I / O using the I / O expansion chip 181 is shown. Alternatively, a system in which I / O is expanded by using a decoder can be configured.
FIG. 91A shows how to generate a chip selection signal when configuring a system in which I / O expansion is performed using the I / O expansion chip 181, and FIG. 91B shows an I / O expansion chip. A method of generating a chip selection signal when configuring a system in which I / O is expanded using a decoder instead of 181 will be described.

When an I / O expansion system is configured using a decoder, the decoder uses chip selection signals CS11 to CS15 output from the CPU 111A, and uses CS15 as an enable signal, and CS15 is at a low level. Sometimes, CS11 to CS14 are decoded to generate the extended chip selection signals ECS1 to ECS15.
With the configuration as shown in FIG. 91 (A) or (B), it is possible to expand I / O without increasing the number of external terminals of the CPU 111A.
When the function for generating the extended chip selection signals ECS1 to ECS15 and expanding the I / O is used, the ECS mode, which is a mode for enabling the extended function via the game program (HW parameter), is set. There is a need to.
When the chip selection signals CS11 to CS15 are generated using the I / O expansion chip 181, the CPU 111A outputs addresses A0 to A3, and the decoder is used to configure the I / O expansion system. The CPU 111A may output the chip selection signals CS11 to CS15, decode the CS11 to CS14, and generate the extended chip selection signals ECS1 to ECS15. When FIG. 91A is applied, a decoding circuit for decoding the addresses A0 to A3 is provided on the main board as described later (FIG. 100) to generate the extended chip selection signals ECS1 to ECS15. May be.

  FIG. 92 shows a configuration example of a circuit for inputting signals from various ball detection switches to the CPU via the relay terminal plate 80. In FIG. 92, reference numerals 60a, 60b,... 60f are attached to ball detection switches using proximity switches with open collector outputs, and each of the ball detection switches 60a, 60b,. 71b... 71f are connected to the relay terminal board 80, and are further connected to the game control device 100 by a second cable 72 having a plurality of signal lines.

  The reason why the independent cables 71a, 71b,... 71f are used as the switch-side cables is that the ball detection switches 60a, 60b,... 60f are provided at different positions on the game board. In this embodiment, connectors 81a, 81b,... 81f that can be connected to the end connectors 73a, 73b,... 73f of the cables 71a, 71b,. Connector 82 to which the side connector 74 can be connected, signal lines 83a, 83b... 83f made of printed wiring connecting the connectors 81a, 81b... 81f and the connector 82, and ground lines for applying a ground potential to each connector. 84a and 84b are provided.

  The connector 74 on the start end side of the second cable 72 and the connector 82 on the relay terminal board 80 are integrated connectors common to a plurality of signals. The reason why the integrated connector is used is that the connection work is easier than when separate connectors are used. However, when such an integrated connector is used, there is a problem in that a half-inserted state is likely to occur because the insertion resistance is larger than when independent connectors such as connectors 81a, 81b... 81f are used. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to make it possible to detect the half-insertion state, the pull-up resistors Rp1, Rp1, connected between the signal lines 83a, 83b,... 83f and the power supply voltage terminal VSW are connected to the relay terminal board 80. Rp2... Rp6 is provided. The pull-up resistors Rp1, Rp2,... Rp6 have been conventionally provided on the game control device 100 side.

  On the board of the game control device 100, an integrated connector 94 that can be connected to the connector 77 on the terminal end side of the second cable 72 is provided. The connector 94 and an interface chip for a proximity switch (proximity I / F) There are provided signal lines 91a, 91b,... 91f made of printed wiring for connecting the input terminals A1, A2,. A composite resistor 70f having a resistor group functioning as a pull-down resistor connected between each signal line 91a, 91b... 91f and the ground terminal GND is provided.

Further, an IC constituting the input port 122 (see FIG. 3) is mounted on the board of the game control apparatus 100, and the input terminals Y1, Y2... Y6 of the proximity I / F 121 and the input port 122 are input. Signal lines 92a, 92b,... 92f made of printed wirings connecting the terminals A1, A2,. The proximity I / F 121 includes a function for detecting an abnormality of the input signal and an error terminal E for outputting a signal notifying the abnormality. A signal line for connecting the error terminal E and the input terminal A7 of the input port 123. 92h is provided. Since the output of the proximity I / F 121 is an open collector, a composite resistor 70g having a resistor group functioning as a pull-up resistor connected between the signal lines 92a, 92b... 92h and the power supply voltage terminal Vcc. Is provided.
Although not particularly limited, TL-PP153 is used for the sphere detection switch 60, 2STB155PP is used for the proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121, 74HC244 is used for the input ports 122 and 123, and the like. Can be considered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the pull-up resistors Rp1, Rp2,... Rp6 are provided on the relay terminal board 80, and the composite resistor having a resistor group functioning as a pull-down resistor on the board of the game control device 100. 70f is provided, even if the connector 74 on the start end side or the connector 77 on the end end side of the second cable 72 is half-inserted or improperly half-inserted, the proximity I / Since the input voltage Vin of F121 has a waveform that crosses the short-circuit determination level lower than the “no sphere” determination level, it can be determined as abnormal. Even when the second cable 72 is disconnected, an abnormality can be determined by the input voltage Vin of the proximity I / F 121 becoming the ground potential. The proximity I / F 121 outputs an abnormality detection signal E when such an abnormality is detected.

FIG. 93 shows a specific example of the composite resistor 70 and a substrate when the composite resistor is used as the composite resistor 70g between the proximity I / FIC 121 and the input port IC 122 in the circuit diagram of FIG. An example of the layout above is shown. 93A is a front view of the composite resistor in FIG. 93A, and FIG. 93B shows a state in which the composite resistor 70 in FIG. 93A is vertically inserted into the substrate from a direction perpendicular to the paper surface. .
In the composite resistor 70 of FIG. 93A, eight resistance elements R are molded in a package made of resin or the like, and a common connection of the eight resistance elements from one side (lower side in the figure) of the package. A common terminal pin P1 connected to the node Nc and eight terminal pins P2 to P9 connected to one end of each resistance element are provided so as to protrude to the outside.
In the layout diagram of FIG. 93B, reference numeral VCC denotes a wiring pattern for supplying a power supply voltage Vcc, and reference numeral GND denotes a wiring pattern for supplying a ground potential (0 V). The composite resistor 70 in FIG. 93 (A) has a configuration having eight resistance elements and nine terminal pins P1 to P9, but is not limited to this, and n (n is a positive number). An (integer) resistor element and (n + 1) terminal pins can be used.

  In the case of the composite resistor 70 having the structure shown in FIG. 93A, as shown in FIG. 93B, the proximity I / FIC 121 is placed on the board on which the proximity I / FIC 121 and the input port IC 122 are mounted. And signal wiring patterns 92a, 92b... 92f and power supply wiring patterns 95a, 95b made of a conductive layer such as copper for connecting corresponding terminals of the input port IC 122, and a substrate is formed on a part of these wiring patterns. A through hole through which the terminal pin can be inserted is formed so as to penetrate. Then, by inserting the nine terminal pins P1 to P9 of the composite resistor 70g into these through holes and soldering the end portions of the terminal pins protruding from the back surface of the substrate by flow processing or the like, A process for connecting a pull-up resistor and a process for stabilizing the potential of the common connection node Nc of the resistance elements can be performed.

  That is, conventionally, individual two-terminal resistance elements, such as pull-up resistors Rp1, Rp2,... Rp6 on the relay terminal plate 80 shown in FIG. 6 resistance elements must be mounted on the substrate. Further, branch lines from the signal lines 83a to 83f are also required to connect the resistance elements, so that the wiring pattern is complicated. For this reason, the layout design and mounting work of the board are troublesome and the mounting area is large. On the other hand, if the composite type resistor 70 having the structure as shown in FIG. 93A is used, only one component needs to be mounted. Thus, the mounting work is simplified and the mounting area is reduced. is there.

In FIG. 93B, if the terminal pin P8 is not used, the upper end of the wiring pattern 95b is extended to the position of P8 so that the power supply voltage Vcc is also applied to the terminal pin P8. it can.
Since the composite resistor 70f shown in FIG. 93B is for pull-down, the composite resistor 70e is connected to the wiring pattern for supplying the ground potential to the common resistor COM. It can be easily implemented in a similar manner. Further, with respect to the composite resistors 70a, 70b, 70c, 70d, and 70e shown in FIG. 89, the wiring that transmits the power supply voltage to the vacant terminals in the same manner as the composite resistor 70f of FIG. It can be mounted in a state where it is connected to the pattern and subjected to a potential stabilization process.

Next, the data of the data by the CPU 111A from the device placed in the memory space (or I / O space) and brought into the selected state by the chip selection signal CSx (x = 1, 2,... 15) being set to the low level. Read timing and write timing will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 94, (A) shows the timing at the time of data reading, and (B) shows the timing at the time of data writing.
At the time of data reading, the CPU 111A first outputs the lower 8 bits A0 to A7 of the address given to the device to be selected in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal CLK (timing t1). Subsequently, in synchronization with the fall of the clock signal CLK, the memory data request control signal MREQ (IREQ) and the read control signal RD are asserted to a low level which is an effective level (timing t2).

In the system of the present embodiment, since the memory mapped I / O method in which the I / O device is arranged in the memory space is adopted, the user can arbitrarily set the memory data request control signal MREQ (IREQ) by asserting it. The data can be read from the I / O device arranged at the address position.
When MREQ (IREQ) and RD are asserted, the chip selection signal CSx corresponding to the lower 8 bits A0 to A8 of the address output from the CPU 111A is changed to a low level with a predetermined time delay from the timing t1 (timing t3). . Data D0 to D7 are output on the data bus from the device selected by the chip selection signal CSx. On the other hand, in accordance with this data output, the CPU 111A takes in the data D0 to D7 on the bus at the rising edge of the clock signal CLK two cycles after the timing t1 (timing t4).

Thereafter, the CPU 111A negates the memory data request control signal MREQ (IREQ) and the read control signal RD to a high level which is an invalid level at the falling edge of the clock signal CLK two cycles after the timing t1 (timing t5). Then, the selected device stops outputting data onto the bus with a predetermined time delay from the timing t5, and the CPU changes the chip selection signal CSx to a high level, thereby completing a series of read sequences.
By performing timing control as described above, data can be reliably read from a desired device.

At the time of data writing, the CPU 111A outputs the lower 8 bits A0 to A7 of the address given to the device to be selected first in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal CLK (timing t11). Subsequently, the data request control signal MREQ (IREQ) is asserted to a low level which is an effective level in synchronization with the falling of the clock signal CLK (timing t12). The CPU 111A outputs write data on the bus at the rising edge of the clock signal CLK one cycle after the timing t11 (timing t13).
Further, the CPU 111A asserts the write control signal WR to the low level in synchronization with the falling of the clock signal CLK one cycle after the timing t11 (timing t14). Further, the chip selection signal CSx is changed to the low level after a predetermined time from the timing t14 (timing t15). Thereby, the selected device takes in the data D0 to D7 output by the CPU 111A on the bus.

Thereafter, the CPU 111A negates the write control signal WR to the high level which is an invalid level at the falling edge of the clock signal CLK three cycles after the timing t11 (timing t16). Further, the chip selection signal CSx is changed to the high level with a predetermined time delay from the timing t16. Then, the CPU 111A stops outputting data on the bus at the rising edge of the clock signal CLK three cycles after the timing t11 (timing t17), thereby completing a series of writing sequences.
By performing the timing control as described above, it is possible to reliably write data to a desired device.

Next, a modification of the game control apparatus 100 of the above embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modification shown in FIG. 95, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 uses the data bus 140 in time division for the input / output of the 8-bit data signals D0 to D7 and the output of the upper 8 bits A8 to A15 of the address. The system configured as described above corresponds to the circuit diagram of the system of FIG. 92 is different from the system of FIG. 92 in that the number of signals transmitted from the input port IC 122 to the CPU is seven in FIG. 92, and therefore the data output terminal Y8 is not connected to the signal line of the data bus 140. On the other hand, in FIG. 95, the data output terminal Y8 is connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140 even if the number of signals transmitted from the input port IC 122 to the CPU is seven. It is in. A ground potential is applied to the data input terminal A8 of the input port IC122.

  When the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC 122 is connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140 in this way, the ground potential is applied to the data input terminal A8 of the input port IC 122. The signal line of the bit D7 changes to a low level (0 V) when the CPU releases the bus. As a result, it is possible to avoid a problem such that the input potential of the bit D7 of the CPU becomes indefinite when the CPU reads data, and erroneous data is taken in or a through current flows through the data input buffer. it can.

Hereinafter, the difference between the system of FIG. 92 and the system of FIG. 95 will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.
FIG. 96 shows the timing when data is read by the CPU. The overall timing is almost the same as that in FIG. The difference is that, in FIG. 96, the higher bits A8 to A15 of the address are also output at the same timing t1 as the output of the lower addresses A0 to A7.
96B shows the change in the potential of the signal line of the bit D7 in the system of FIG. 92 in which the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC 122 is not connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140. (C) shows the potential change of the signal line of the bit D7 in the system of FIG. 95 in which the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC122 is connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (B), when the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC 122 is not connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140, the CPU uses the upper bits A8 to A15 of the address. After the timing t2 when the output is stopped and the bus is released, the signal line of the bit D7 becomes floating, and when the logic of the immediately preceding address A15 is high level, the potential of the signal line of the bit D7 changes from high level (Vcc). The current gradually decreases due to the leakage current.

On the other hand, when the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC 122 is connected to the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140, as shown in FIG. 96C, the timing t2 when the CPU releases the bus. Thus, the potential of the signal line of the bit D7 of the data bus 140 is fixed to the ground potential (0) by the output of the data output terminal Y8 of the input port IC122.
As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the input potential of the bit D7 of the CPU becomes indefinite when the CPU reads data, and erroneous data is taken in or a through current flows through the data input buffer. It will be possible.

From the above description, in the above embodiment,
A game control device (100) having game control means (CPU 111A) for comprehensively controlling games, and capable of giving a specific game value to a player in response to detection of a predetermined game medium;
A clock signal output means (oscillation circuit 113) for outputting an operation clock signal of the game control means or a clock signal based thereon;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game control device includes:
A plurality of resistance elements, a common terminal (COM) to which one terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected together and applied with a predetermined voltage from the outside, and the other terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected to each element A composite resistor (70a) having a plurality of individual terminals,
One of the individual terminals of the composite resistor is connected to a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means, and a predetermined voltage is applied via the resistance element. The clock signal output means can be configured to transmit a predetermined range of voltage levels as the clock signal to the game control means,
An invention in which the same voltage as the predetermined voltage applied to the common terminal is applied to some of the individual terminals of the composite resistor without connecting the signal wiring to some of the individual terminals. Is found to be included.

  According to the invention as described above, even if the connection of the common terminal of the composite resistor is defective and a stable voltage is not applied from the outside, some of the individual terminals are connected to the signal wiring. Since the same voltage as the predetermined voltage applied to the common terminal is applied without connecting the terminals, the potentials of the common terminal nodes of the plurality of resistance elements connected to the common terminal are floated to transmit the clock signal. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the potential of the signal wiring is not determined.

In the embodiment, the signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means is composed of a wiring pattern of a conductive layer formed on an insulating substrate, and the wiring pattern A through hole is formed in the middle of which the individual terminal of the composite resistor can be connected so as to penetrate the insulating substrate,
The composite resistor includes an invention in which the composite resistor is connected to the wiring pattern through the through hole.

  Conventionally, a pull-up resistor connected to a signal wiring that transmits a signal output by an open collector method is generally connected by branching a wiring pattern. Since the resistor is connected to the wiring pattern through a through hole provided in the middle of the wiring pattern, the composite resistor can be connected to the wiring pattern without branching the wiring pattern.

  Note that the above-described technique for avoiding a situation in which the potential of the signal wiring is not fixed by connecting the composite resistor is obtained from the clock signal output means (oscillation circuit 113) to the game control means (CPU 111A). (CLK signal) is not limited to the signal wiring for transmitting, but the signal wiring for transmitting the detection signal of the game medium (game ball) to the CPU, the reset signal output means (power supply monitoring circuit 431) to the game control means (CPU 111A) ) Signal wiring for transmitting a reset signal (RST signal), signal wiring for transmitting a power failure detection signal (NMI signal), selection signals (CS, XCS) from the CPU to the input / output port and the I / O expansion chip Signal wiring for transmitting a signal), a write signal (WR signal), a read signal (RD signal), and an operation request signal from the CPU to the I / O expansion chip. (IREQ signal, MREQ signal), signal wiring for transmitting an expansion reset signal (XRST signal), signal wiring for transmitting an expansion selection signal (ECS signal) from an I / O expansion chip to an input / output port, input / output Signal wiring for transmitting a reset signal (RST signal) to a port or an I / O expansion chip, signal wiring for transmitting an abnormality detection signal (E signal) from the proximity switch interface IC to the CPU, and I / O from the CPU The present invention can also be applied to signal wiring for transmitting address signals (A0 to A3) to the expansion chip.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the I / O expansion chip 181 provided in the game control device (main board) 100 provides an expansion chip select signal (a chip select signal output in common to a plurality of address spaces). Generated and output to the extended output port IC, and sent from the game control device 100 to the testing test device in the storage area of the RAM 111C (FIGS. 3 and 4) in correspondence with the address for generating the extended chip select signal. Information output at the time of inspection such as jackpot signal and symbol data is stored. Then, when the CPU 111A outputs a predetermined address assigned to the storage area in which the inspection information is stored, the inspection information is output from the RAM onto the data bus. At the same time, a part of the predetermined address output by the CPU 111A (lower several bits, for example, A0 to A3) is output to the external bus. Upon receiving this address, the I / O expansion chip 181 receives the expansion chip select signal. The extended output port IC selected by the select signal takes in the information for inspection on the data bus, temporarily stores it, and outputs it to the test apparatus.

Here, first, a description will be given of how to output test information such as jackpot signals and symbol data from the game control device 100 to the test device for testing in a conventional gaming machine, and problems thereof.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, as shown in FIG. 97, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 and output ports IC 78a to 78h that output inspection information such as jackpot signals and symbol data sent to the testing device for inspection, etc. Are connected via the data bus 140, and the chip selection signals CS8 to CS15 are output from the CPU 111A to the output ports IC 78a to 78h. The CPU 111A may be configured to output the inspection information on the data bus in parallel with the output of the chip selection signals CS8 to CS15. 97, the output ports IC 78a to 78h on the right side of the broken line EE are mounted on the relay board 170 shown in FIG.
In such a system, a person who intends to perform fraud monitors the chip selection signals CS8 to CS15 output from the CPU 111A and the data (information for inspection) on the data bus 140, whereby the chip selection signal and the inspection are checked. There is a problem that the relationship between the game information and the game control state and the game control program can be analyzed relatively easily.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, in order to solve the above problems, as shown in FIG. 98, an I / O expansion chip 181 is provided on the main board of the game control apparatus 100, and the The I / O expansion chip 181 generates and outputs expansion chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 for selecting the output ports IC 78a to 78n. Also in the present embodiment, a composite resistor 70e that functions as a pull-up resistor is connected to a signal line that transmits these chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15.
Corresponding to the addresses for generating the expansion chip select signals ECS0 to ECS15, a jackpot signal, symbol data, etc. sent from the game control device 100 to the testing test device are stored in the storage area of the RAM 111C (FIGS. 3 and 4). Information output at the time of inspection is stored. When the CPU 111A outputs a predetermined address assigned to the storage area in which the inspection information is stored, the inspection information is output from the CPU onto the data bus, and the predetermined address output by the CPU 111A is output. Are output to the external bus, and the select signals ECS0 to ECS15 are generated by the I / O expansion chip 181.

At this time, for example, if the inspection information I1 to I8 is stored in the storage areas where the addresses A0 to A3 and A8 to A15 are common and A4 to A7 are different, the information is output onto the data bus. In addition, the same selector signal corresponding to the addresses A0 to A3 can be generated, and the inspection information I1 to I8 can be taken into the same output port IC. The method of assigning addresses is not limited to this, and may be assigned by other methods.
From the above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of selection areas for outputting a common selection signal are provided for a plurality of addresses assigned to the RAM as the storage means, and a game is provided in the plurality of selection areas. Information that is output when the machine is inspected is stored.
98, the circuit in the range surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line F corresponds to the portion of the circuit indicated by the alternate long and short dash line F in FIG. 89, and is the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line F in FIG. The game control device (main board) 100 in the second embodiment can be realized by replacing this circuit with the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line F in FIG.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the address signals A0 to A3 from the CPU 111A are fetched by the I / O expansion chip 181 and decoded, so that the chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS0 to the output ports IC78a to 78n are obtained. A game control device (main board) is configured to generate and output the ECS 15.
This eliminates the need for the CPU 111A to output a chip selection signal (CS4 to CS15 in FIG. 88) other than for I / O port selection on the main board, that is, the chip selection signal for the output port IC that takes in the inspection information is displayed in the CPU. Will not be output. Therefore, illegal analysis of the game control program by monitoring the chip selection signal output from the CPU and the inspection information on the data bus can be made difficult.

Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine provided on the market by mounting a circuit in a range surrounded by a dashed line F or a chip 181 for I / O expansion on the main board only at the time of inspection is a gaming control device ( The circuit is shipped with the circuit in the range of the one-dot chain line F in FIG. 98 or the I / O expansion chip 181 removed from the main board.
The second embodiment can be applied simultaneously with the first embodiment by providing two I / O expansion chips 181 on the main board of the game control apparatus 100. That is, one I / O expansion chip 181 is used to generate a chip selection signal such as an output port IC (132) for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control device 300, and the other I / O expansion chip. The chip 181 is used to generate chip selection signals for the output ports ICs 78a to 78n for outputting inspection information to the test apparatus.

In this case, two I / O expansion chips 181 are mounted on the main board at the time of inspection, and only one I / O expansion chip (for outputting an effect control command or the like) is mounted at the time of shipment. It will be.
As described above, by removing the I / O expansion chip 181 for outputting inspection information at the time of shipment, chip selection of the output port ICs 78a to 78n is performed on the main board of the gaming machine installed in the game shop. The signals ECS0 to ECS15 cannot be monitored, and simply monitoring the signals on the data bus makes it impossible to know which timing signal is the inspection information, making it more difficult to perform illegal analysis of the game control program. Can be.

As a test signal sent from the game control device 100 to the test device for inspection, for example, there are the following signals.
Condition device active signal / actor continuous actuator active signal special signal 1 special signal per signal 2 special signal 2 electric signal 1 active signal special symbol 1 variable signal special signal 1 symbol data special symbol 2 variable signal special signal Fig. 2 Symbol data Special symbol 1 High probability state signal Special symbol 1 Fluctuation time shortened state signal Special symbol 2 High probability state signal Special symbol 2 Fluctuation time shortened state signal Normal signal per symbol Normal electric actor 1 In operation signal Normal symbol data Normal symbol variation signal Normal symbol high probability state signal Normal symbol variation time shortening state signal / Normal electric accessory release state signal Gaming machine error state signal

Next, a modified example of the game control apparatus 100 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the modification shown in FIG. 99, in the system shown in FIG. 98, an I / O expansion chip 181 provided on the main board of the game control apparatus 100 is mounted on the relay board 170, and the address bus 140A is sent from the CPU 111A. The address signals A0 to A3 and the chip selection signal CS11 are transmitted to the I / O expansion chip 181 through A1 and A0 to A3 are decoded, whereby the chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 of the output ports IC78a to 78n are obtained. It is made to generate.
Also in this modified example, information for inspection is stored in the storage area of the RAM 111C corresponding to the plurality of addresses where the chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS15 are generated, and when the ECS0 to ECS15 are generated, Information for inspection is read out. Accordingly, a plurality of selection areas for outputting a common selection signal to a plurality of addresses assigned to the storage means are provided, and information output at the time of inspection of the gaming machine can be stored in the plurality of selection areas. Will be.

Also in this modified example, it is not necessary to output a chip selection signal (CS4 to CS15 in FIG. 88) other than for I / O port selection on the main board from the CPU 111A, and an I / O expansion chip 181 is mounted. Since the relay board 170 is removed from the gaming machines provided on the market, it is possible to make illegal analysis of the game control program by monitoring the address signal and the chip selection signal difficult.
Further, the chip selection signal CS11 is transmitted from the CPU 111A to the I / O expansion chip 181 via the buffer BFF11 as unidirectional information transmission means, and the address signals A0 to A3 are also transmitted via the buffers BFF0 to BFF3. To be sent. An inverter may be used instead of the buffer. Further, a buffer may be provided on a signal line for transmitting a signal on the data bus 140 to the relay board 170.

As described above, the game control device (main board) 100 transmits the address signal (A0 to A3) that can specify a plurality of addresses output from the CPU 111A and the common selection signal (CS11) to one-way information transmission. By being configured to be transmitted to the outside of the game control device via the means, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that causes an incorrect signal to be input from the outside to the game control device (CPU 111A). .
Each of the buffers is mounted on the game control device (main board) at the time of inspection, and is removed from the game control device except at the time of inspection. With this configuration, the gaming machine is shipped with the buffer serving as the information transmission means removed, and therefore, the output port selection signal is monitored on the main board of the gaming machine installed in the gaming store. It is impossible to know which timing signal is the inspection information simply by monitoring the signal on the data bus, and it is difficult to perform illegal analysis of the game control program.

In the modification shown in FIG. 100, in the system shown in FIG. 98, the CPU 111A replaces the I / O expansion chip 181 provided on the main board of the game control device 100 with a decode circuit (decoder IC) 182. The address signals A0 to A2 are input to the decoding circuit 182 via the address bus 140A and decoded to generate the chip selection signals ECS0 to ECS4 of the output ports IC 78a to 78e.
In FIG. 100, the configuration in the case where there are five output port ICs is shown. However, when the address signal input to the decode circuit 182 is 3 bits A0 to A2, a maximum of eight on the relay board 170. An output port IC can be provided.

Also in the modification shown in FIG. 100, it is not necessary to output a chip selection signal (CS4 to CS15 in FIG. 88) other than for I / O port selection on the main board from the CPU 111A, and in a gaming machine provided to the market Can remove the decoding circuit 182 from the main board of the game control device 100, thereby making it difficult to illegally analyze the game control program by monitoring the address signal and the chip selection signal.
In the modification shown in FIG. 99, the I / O expansion chip 181 mounted on the relay board 170 is replaced with the decode circuit 182, that is, the decode circuit 182 in FIG. It can also be implemented.

In the conventional gaming machine, the test signal is output to the inspection terminal or the inspection information extraction unit at the same time as the inspection other than at the time of the inspection, so that the state inside the gaming machine may be illegally captured. However, in the second embodiment, the game control device is stored in the storage means, game control means for comprehensively controlling the game, storage means for storing information relating to game control in the game control means, and the storage means. Corresponding to the information being used for control by the game control means, and a selection signal output means for outputting a selection signal, and stored in the storage means corresponding to the output of the selection signal The stored information is output to the outside of the game control device, and the storage means is assigned a plurality of selection areas in which a common selection signal is output for a plurality of addresses assigned to the storage means. Since the information output at the time of inspection of the gaming machine is stored in the plurality of selection areas, in the gaming machine capable of outputting the information (test signal) output at the time of inspection of the gaming machine, It is possible to prevent the state inside the gaming machine from being illegally captured from a terminal or signal line that outputs information or signals for use. As a result, illegal analysis of the game control program can be made difficult.
In this modification, a buffer is provided on a connection line that connects the game control apparatus (CPU 111A) and the test apparatus. However, the game control apparatus (CPU 111A) and the test apparatus are not limited to this modification, and may be used in other embodiments. A buffer may be provided on the connection line to be connected so that it can be removed except during inspection.

  101 and 102 show examples of bit allocation to the output port dedicated to the test signal output from the main board of the game control apparatus 100 to the test apparatus, and FIG. 103 shows the input / output of the main board output to the test apparatus. An example of a test signal that is also used as a signal is shown. "Combined test signal" means that the signal (input system signal) input to the main board is output to the test equipment as it is, or the signal (output system signal) output from the main board to peripheral devices such as solenoids is tested as it is It is a signal that is output to the device. Since these signals do not require waveform shaping, they can be output to the test apparatus as they are.

  In FIGS. 101 and 102, bits marked with * (bits 3 and 6 of output port 1 in FIG. 101 and bits 3 to 7 of output port 5 in FIG. 102) are output depending on the specifications of the model. When the signal is not generated and is not output, the corresponding bit is fixed to “0” by the program. This allows the main board to be designed in common, for example, for gaming machines with "small hits" and for gaming machines without "small hits", reducing costs and man-hours for preparing application documents to the gaming machine certification organization. There is an advantage that can be reduced.

Here, the contents of the signals shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 will be briefly described. In the following description, “ON output” means outputting a logic H (high level) signal, and “OFF output” means outputting a logic L (low level) signal.
Conditional device operation signal: This signal is turned on when the conditional device is activated, and is turned off when the operation is completed.
-A continuous action device operating signal is turned on at the start of operation of the continuous action device, and is turned off at the end of the operation.
・ Normal signal per signal: This signal turns on when the normal symbol turns on. When the normal symbol fluctuates and stops, it turns on when the symbol is a hit symbol, and turns off at the end of the normal symbol termination process. . Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, up to four normal symbols can be provided, but since only one type of gaming machine can be provided, use “1” (a gaming machine with a special electric accessory is Normal design is limited to 1).
・ Normal electric accessory 1 operation signal: A signal that turns on during operation of the prize opening and during the winning validity period after the completion of the opening of the prize opening. It turns on when it is, and turns off at the end of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing.

Special signal 1 small hit signal: Special signal 1 is changed by a signal that is turned on while special figure 1 is making a small hit (while the condition device does not operate and the special electric accessory operates), Turns on when a small hit symbol is established when the stop is confirmed (at the start of a small hit fanfare), and turns off at the end of the small hit end processing.
Special signal 1 signal: A signal that is turned on while Special Figure 1 is hit (while the special device is activated and the special electric component is activated). Turns on when the big hit symbol is confirmed (at the start of the big hit fanfare) and turns off at the end of the big hit end processing.
・ Special electric accessory 1 operation signal: A signal that turns on during the operation of the special prize opening (1) and during the winning validity period after the completion of the special prize opening. It turns on when it is a big win symbol (〃) and turns off at the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing in the final round (unlike usual figures, Special Figure 1 and Special Electric 1 are not necessarily one-on-one (There is also the specification of a pattern with two special drawings and one big prize opening.)

Normal signal 1 changing signal: A signal that turns on while the normal symbol is changing.
Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal: A signal that turns on while the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high.
-Normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal: A signal that is turned on while the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is in a shortening state.
-Normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal: A signal that turns on while the time such as the opening of the public power is extended. The normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, and the normal electric accessory release extension state signal are standard output specifications for the same period, but for example, the variation time is shortened and the opening time is prolonged. However, the same board can be used for different specifications by assigning each one independently so that the specifications can be applied such that the probability does not change.
Special symbol 1 high probability state signal: A signal that turns on while the special symbol 1 has a high probability.
Special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal: A signal that turns on while the special symbol 1 has a high probability. The specifications of “low probability / no time reduction”, “low probability / time reduction”, “high probability / time reduction”, “high probability / no time reduction” can be considered, so the signals are independent. If there is a special figure 2, the two signals having the same name are output in the same state in both special figures 1 and 2. Since there is also a specification without special figure 2, the signals are divided between special figures 1 and 2.

Special symbol 1 symbol data bits 0 to 5: A signal for outputting a stop symbol number of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1). A number is a combination of bits. A value corresponding to the stop symbol number is output at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the state is maintained until the next fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started. The data output to the test equipment is 8 bits, but the main control board outputs the lower 6 bits, and the rest is output on the relay board with 0 fixed. Therefore, there are 64 symbol numbers that can be controlled by the main control program.
-Gaming machine error status signal: A signal that is turned on while an error occurs in the gaming machine, and continues to be turned on as long as any one of the factors occurs. (Factors on the main control board: Vibration fraud etc. may be added depending on the model such as magnet fraud, board radio fraud, big prize opening fraud, ordinary power fraud, frame radio fraud, etc. Also, a gaming machine error status signal is output from the payout control board, and two signals with the main control board are combined (ORed) on the relay board and output to the test device. The main control board and the payout control board, such as when an out-of-frame error occurs, an overflow error occurs, a frame radio wave error occurs, a switch error error occurs, a payout shortage error occurs, a payout excessive error occurs, or a card unit disconnection error occurs Both of them output with fraudulent radio waves.)
Normal symbol 1 symbol data bits 0 to 2: Almost the same as the above special symbol. Here, up to 3 bits out of 8 bits are controlled by software, so you can have up to 8 symbols.

-Launch position designation signal 1: A signal that turns on while you want to designate the position of the game ball to be fired on the board as a position different from the normal game (left-handed, etc.). Yes, turn on as a specified signal when you do not win if you do not make a right turn (on from the jackpot fanfare start to the end of the jackpot that will open the right big prize opening will be turned on until the end of the ending, and then the right power in the game after that If you want to aim, keep it on, and keep it on until the extension of the public train ends.) This signal is not used (always off) when it is not necessary to change the position according to the state of the game or the like (it is not necessary to specify a target location, for example, it is always necessary to aim at the same position). If it is desired to hit a ball at a different position, the launch position designation signals 2 and 3 may be provided.
-Easy winning status signals 1 to 4: Multiple winning easy states (a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, a normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, or a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned on) This is a signal that is turned on during each easy-to-win state, and is represented by a numerical value of 0 to 15 in combination with a 4-bit signal. In this assignment, the lower 3 bits are controlled by software, so up to 8 types can be controlled. However, in this embodiment, since there is only one easy winning state, the signal is not used and is always off.
Easy winning status determination signal: This signal is turned on when the easy winning status signal changes, and acts like a strobe signal for notifying the testing device of the change point. For example, 128 ms on. In this embodiment, it is unused and always off. The output starts before (or at the same time as) the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal or the like changes so that the test apparatus can easily cope.

Next, the random number generation function of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Some conventional gaming microcomputers have a random number generation circuit configured as an external circuit, but the gaming microcomputer of this embodiment has a built-in random number generation circuit.
The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU core 111A, an interrupt controller 118 serving as an interrupt control circuit, and a reset interrupt control circuit 119 to which a reset signal RST generated by the control signal generator 430 (see FIG. 3) is input as an interrupt signal. And a random number generation circuit 210 that generates random numbers used for game control, a random number latch register group 220 that includes a plurality of registers that latch the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 210, a random number generation circuit 210, and a random number latch register group 220 A random number control circuit 240 for controlling the operation clock, an operation clock supplied to each block in the gaming microcomputer 111 based on a system clock MCLK supplied from the outside and an external clock EXCLK for updating the random number, a timer interrupt clock, a counter Update clock etc. Comprising a clock generator 230 which formed.

  The interrupt control controller 118 makes an interrupt request to the CPU core 111A in response to an interrupt request signal from the outside, or sends a control signal to a circuit (for example, a random number generation control circuit) inside the chip. In addition, the reset interrupt control circuit 119 generates a signal for resetting the CPU core 111A in response to a reset signal input from the outside and for setting various resources inside the gaming microcomputer 111 to an initial state.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the detection signals DET0 and DET1 from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input to the interrupt controller 118 through the inverting circuit 112 as interrupt request signals. DET2 is a spare interrupt request signal input prepared for a gaming machine provided with three start ports. When the detection signals DET0 and DET1 (DET2) are input to the interrupt controller 118, one of the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 210 is latched in a corresponding latch register in the random number latch register group 220.

The random number generation circuit 210 is a 16-bit variable-length random number circuit 211 that generates a variation pattern random number for selecting a variation pattern, and a 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit 212 that generates a big hit random number used to determine whether or not to make a big hit. , A big hit symbol random number for selecting a big hit stop symbol, an 8-bit variable length random number circuit 213 for generating a small hit symbol number for selecting a small hit symbol, etc. And a latch logic selection register 215 for selecting and setting the logic level of an external random number latch signal (start winning detection signals DET0 and DET1 input to the interrupt controller 118).
The 16-bit fixed length random number circuit 212 and the 8-bit fixed length random number 214 are updated every update clock, whereas the 16-bit variable length random number circuit 211 is updated every 31 update clocks, and the 8-bit variable length random number 213 is 41 It is updated every update clock, and random values are updated while taking random values as starting values, and all values appear once without any overlap during one round.

Among the random number generation circuits, the random number generated by the 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit 212 can be set to a bit transposition pattern of random numbers as shown in FIG. 7 by the HW parameter in the user program ROM 111B.
The random number latch register group 220 includes register sets 221 to 224 each including three latch registers 0 to 2 corresponding to DET 0 to 2 for each of the random number generation circuits 211 to 214. Each latch register stores a different random value for each system reset.

The 16-bit variable length random number circuit 211 includes a maximum value setting register 211A for setting a maximum value of random numbers, that is, an update range, a calculation work area 211B used for updating random numbers, and a latch for random numbers updated in the calculation work area 211B. A latch permission prohibition register 211C as permission information storage means for permitting or prohibiting (capture), a status register 211D indicating the state of the 16-bit variable length random number circuit 211, and a start winning ball (latch signal) are continuously generated. The latch mode register 211E can set whether to hold the contents of the latch register or to update the contents of the latch register every time a latch signal is generated. With the latch mode register 211E, it is possible to select whether the data latched in the latch register is held until it is read by the CPU or overwritten without being held.
When setting the upper limit of the random number in the maximum value setting register 211A by the user program, writing is performed with a 1-byte instruction, and when acquiring a random number, it is performed with a 2-byte instruction so that the random number is being acquired from the latch register. The random number is not updated and the wrong random number is acquired, and when the upper limit value of the random number is set in the maximum value setting register 211A, the random number generation circuit 210 is activated. Etc. need not be provided.
After the random number generation circuit 210 is activated, the maximum value cannot be changed.

In the random number generation circuit 210 of this embodiment, the random number control circuit 240 reads a random number value from the calculation work area 211B, performs a predetermined calculation (for example, +1, M series calculation), and returns the result to the calculation work area 211B. The random number is updated at. A counter circuit may be provided instead of the calculation work area 211B.
When a system reset occurs, the maximum value setting register 211A is set to the maximum value in the random number updatable range as an initial value, “prohibited” is latched in the latch permission prohibiting register 211C, and latched in the latch register in the latch mode register 211E. Information to be held until the data is read by the CPU is set.

The setting for permitting or prohibiting the latching (fetching) of the random number can be set by a latch permission prohibiting mode register 211C that is set when the random number circuit is activated.
Therefore, in the random number generation circuit 210 of this embodiment, the random number value holding unit is cleared when a predetermined random number acquisition condition occurs as a mode for holding the random number value in the latch register as the random number value holding unit. The first holding mode that takes in and holds the random number value generated in the calculation work area as a random number generation means and the calculation regardless of whether the latch register is cleared or not when a predetermined random number acquisition condition occurs A second holding mode for capturing and holding a random number value generated in the work area, and the first holding mode or the second holding mode via a predetermined game program executed by a gaming microcomputer as a game control means. This means that any one of the holding modes can be selected.
As a result, the degree of freedom of the control content is increased, thereby making it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random value.

The status register 211D clears the latch data flag of the corresponding status register when the CPU core 111A reads the random number of one of the latch registers in the random number latch register group 220 onto the bus 140. Specifically, the random number read signal RRD input to the random number latch register group 220 is input to the random number control circuit 240, and the random number control circuit 240 clears the latch data flag of the status register 211D of the corresponding random number circuit.
Thus, the random number control circuit 240 causes the latch register to latch the random number generated by the corresponding random number circuit in response to the next detection signal being input to the interrupt controller 118. When the random number is latched in the latch register, the latch data flag of the corresponding status register 211D is set to the latched state. On the other hand, the CPU core 111A reads the value of the status register 211D and reads the random number of the corresponding latch register in the random number latch register group 220 when the latch data flag is in a valid state (“1”). It is possible to perform the operation of reading the random number held in the register, judging that it is possible.

  From the above, the random number generation means generates the random number latch register group 220 corresponding to the predetermined random number acquisition condition based on the detection of the game medium by the start port switches 36a and 37a as the game medium detection means. A holding state information storage functioning as a random value holding unit that captures and holds a random value, and the status register 211D stores holding state information indicating whether or not the random number value is held in a random number latch register as a random value holding unit The random value holding means holds until the random number value fetched by the random number latch register as the random number value holding means is acquired by the CPU core 111A as the game control means. It functions as a random value change prohibiting means for prohibiting the change of numerical values.

In the status register 211D, an update error flag indicating whether or not the random number can be updated in the calculation work area, and whether or not the random number can be latched from the random number generation circuit (calculation work area) to the random number latch register. A latch error flag indicating that may be provided.
The status register 211D includes an error status indicating an abnormality in the random number circuit. When an abnormality such as a supply stop during updating with EXCLK occurs, the status register 211D switches to updating with MCLK, and updates with EXCLK when the error status is cleared. It has come to be switched to.

The random number control circuit 240 also clears the latch data flag of the status register 211D when a reset signal is input from the reset interrupt control circuit 119 or the like. At the same time, the random number generation circuit is configured to clear the latch registers corresponding to the random number latch register group 220 when the latch data flag of the status register 211D is cleared. That is, the status register in the random number control circuit 240 of this embodiment also has a function of a control register.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the 16-bit fixed length latch register 222 reads the upper bits of the register, the status register in the 16-bit fixed length random number circuit 212 corresponding to the register is cleared. Yes.

The 16-bit fixed length random number circuit 212, the 8-bit variable length random number circuit 213, and the 8-bit fixed length random number circuit 214 have the same configuration as the 16-bit variable length random number circuit 211. Although not particularly limited, the fixed-length random number circuits 212 and 214 are automatically activated after reset and start generating random numbers, while the variable-length random number circuit 211 (213) is the maximum value setting register 211A (213A). ) Is set to the maximum value (the most significant byte of the upper limit value). When setting the maximum value, if a value smaller than a predetermined value defined in advance is to be set as the maximum value, the default value is set as the maximum value.
Specifically, when 00h is set as the maximum value in the maximum value setting register 211A, the update is performed internally with 20h as the maximum value. When the maximum value setting register 211A is read by the CPU, the set value (00h) can be read instead of the internally set value (20h).

The 8-bit variable length random number circuit 213 generates a hit random number, and the 8-bit fixed length random number circuit 214 generates a big hit symbol random number for selecting a big hit stop symbol, a small hit symbol number for selecting a small hit symbol, and the like. You may do it.
In this embodiment, a latch permission prohibiting register 211C as a permission information storage unit and a latch mode register 211E as a mode setting unit are provided for each random number circuit 211 to 214. It may be provided as a common register.
In this embodiment, the latch register is cleared in response to the data latched in the latch register being read by the CPU. However, the latch mode register 211E is set to overwrite without holding. If it is, the data may be held without clearing the latch register.
In this embodiment, the latch mode register 211E is used for selecting the latch mode, and the latch permission / prohibition register 211C is used for setting the permission / prohibition of the latch. And may be set according to whether it is pulled up (or pulled down).

As described above, the operation of the random number circuit is set via each register, but it may be set by an HW parameter (hardware parameter) set when the CPU is activated.
In addition, the contents set by the HW parameter (hardware parameter) in the present embodiment may be set via a register.
In this embodiment, the detection signals DET0 and DET1 are input to the interrupt controller 118. However, the detection signal from the general-purpose gate switch 37a is input as DET2, and the winning random numbers and winning symbols related to the general-purpose game are input. A random number may also be obtained from the random number generation circuit 210.
In addition, if it is determined in step A201 that there is an input to the start port switch without inputting a detection signal to the interrupt controller 118, a random value may be acquired from the calculation work area 211B.
Further, only when the random number circuit 211 (212 to 214) is stopped, the initial value (start value) of the random number may be set in the calculation work area 211B.

  In the present embodiment, among the random number generation circuits, only the 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit 212 is configured to be operable by either the external clock EXCLK or the system clock MCLK, and the remaining random number circuits 211, 213, and 214 are It is configured to be operable only by the system clock MCLK. Whether the 16-bit fixed length random number circuit 212 is operated by the external clock EXCLK or the system clock MCLK is configured to be specified by a hardware parameter in the user program.

  The clock generator 230 includes a frequency dividing circuit 231 that divides the external clock EXCLK, a frequency dividing circuit 232 that divides the system clock MCLK, and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit 233, and the frequency dividing circuit 231. 232 and 232 divide the external clock EXCLK input from the outside (oscillation circuit), divide the system clock signal MCLK, divide the external clock EXCLK, and the system clock signal A clock signal φ2 having a cycle or a rising timing different from that of the clock signal φ1 or φ1 having a period multiplied by the period is generated and supplied to the random number control circuit 240 and the CTC circuit 233.

The random number control circuit 240 includes a selection circuit 241 for selecting either the clock signal φ1 or φ2, and operates using the clock signal φ1 or φ2 as an operation clock. Whether the random number control circuit 240 sets the selection circuit 241 and operates with the clock signal φ1 or φ2 can be configured to be specified by a hardware parameter in the user program. Further, it is configured to be able to set whether or not to generate a random number forced error internally by a hardware parameter.
The CTC circuit 233 generates a timer interrupt signal (CTC) having a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) to the CPU core 111A based on the clock signal φ2 from the frequency dividing circuit 232. The CTC circuit 233 is configured so that the cycle of the signal CTC to be generated can be set freely.

  In FIG. 105, a latch mode register 211E is provided as in the random number generation circuit shown in FIG. 104, and when the start winning ball (special figure holding exceeding the upper limit value) is continuously generated in the mode register, the latch register The procedure of the special figure start port switch common process when the value of the update is set is shown. When it is set not to update the value of the latch register until the previous value is read by the CPU when the start winning ball is continuously generated, the special-purpose start port switch common process of FIG. 25 is executed. Can do. Note that there is no step of clearing the value of the latch register after loading the random number of the latch register in the special processing start port switch common processing of FIG. 105 and FIG. 25. The process of clearing the value of the latch register is a random number control circuit. This is because it is executed by 240.

The difference between the special figure start port switch common process of FIG. 105 and the special figure start port switch common process of FIG. 25 is the following three points.
First, in step A202, instead of determining whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register, it is determined whether or not there is latched data (flag) in the target random number latch status register 211D. Second, if it is determined in step A209 that the target special figure hold number is not less than or equal to the upper limit value (No), that is, the special figure hold number is the upper limit value, the target random number latch status register 211D is latched. Step A209a for clearing the latched data (flag) is added to the target random number latch status register 211D instead of determining the presence data. Third, in step A209, the target special figure pending number is less than the upper limit value. When it is determined that there is (Yes), the big hit latched in the target random number latch registers 221 to 224 The step A204 to load the number is a point that has moved to the front of the step A212.

When a random number is loaded in step A204, which is shifted to when the target figure holding number is determined to be equal to or less than the upper limit value in step A209 (Yes), as described above, the value of the latch register is controlled by the random number control circuit 240 as described above. Is cleared.
In this way, if the holding state information (flag) stored in the random number latch status register 211D as the holding state information storage unit is cleared, it is held in the latch registers (221 to 224) as the random number holding unit. Since the random number value is cleared, it is not necessary to detect that the random number value is cleared and change the holding state information of the random number latch status register 211D, the control becomes simple, and the latch registers (221 to 224) The state immediately matches the holding state information of the random number latch status register 211D.
Even if latched data (flag) is set in the random number latch status register 211D, the random number latch status register 211D does not change, and the random number value is not latched in the random number latch register.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming microcomputer (random number control circuit) holds the random number value in the random value holding means, the game control means uses the random number value held in the random value holding means. The first initialization unit that clears the random number value held in the random number value holding unit on the condition that it has been acquired, and the random number value on the condition that the holding state information stored in the holding state information storage unit is cleared It functions as a second initialization unit that clears the random number value held in the holding unit.
Further, by providing the step A209a for clearing the latched data (flag) of the target random number latch status register 211D when the special figure hold number reaches the upper limit as described above, the special figure hold number is increased. When a new start prize is generated in a state where the value is a value, the random number latch register as the random value holding means is cleared, and the new random value is latched in the random number latch register. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a new random number value is not latched when a new start prize is generated when the special figure reservation number as the start memory reaches the upper limit value.

FIG. 106 shows an operation when the latch permission prohibition mode register 211C of the random number generation circuit shown in FIG. 104 is set to latch permission. Of these, (A) shows the timing when the latch permission is set immediately after the latch signal rises, and (B) shows the timing when the latch permission is set while the latch signal is rising.
As shown in FIG. 106A, in this embodiment, the latch register to which the value of the random number counter (random number circuits 211 to 214) corresponds to the 256th clock after the latch permission prohibit mode register 211C is set to latch permission. Latched to 221-224. On the other hand, as shown in (B), when the latch permission is set while the latch signal is rising, the value of the random number counter is not latched even if 256 clocks have elapsed. As a result, an illegal act of illegally latching a random number by setting the latch permission prohibition mode register 211C to the latch permission while the latch signal (start winning detection signal) is raised at the time of power-on or the like is set. Can be prevented.
The initial value of the latch permission prohibition mode register 211C when a system reset occurs is set to “prohibited”, and latching is not permitted unless it is set to “permitted” by the game program.

  FIG. 107 shows a waveform example of a PWM drive pulse for driving the solenoids 38b, 39b of the variable winning device (large winning opening) 38, 39. As shown in FIG. 107, in this embodiment, control is performed to change the duty of the pulse in accordance with the opening pattern of the big prize opening. Since the solenoid drive pulse in this embodiment is a pulse in which the low level is an effective period, the pulse duty is the ratio (%) of the low level period to one cycle, and the pulse with a duty of 0% is shown in FIG. A) a signal that is continuously set to a high level as shown in A), and a pulse with a duty of 80% is a signal that sets a low level period to 0.8 ms if one cycle is 1 ms, as shown in FIG. A pulse having a duty of 100% is defined as a signal that is continuously set to a low level as shown in FIG.

When the number of continuous operations is two times, such as 2R big hit, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the solenoids 38b and 39b are driven with a pulse with a duty of 100%. On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations is 16 times, such as 16R big hit, the solenoids 38b and 39b are driven with a pulse of 60% duty, and when the number of continuous operations is 11 times, such as 11R big hit, the solenoids 38b, 39b are driven with a pulse of 80% duty. To do.
In the case of 16R big hit or 11R big hit, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the opening of the movable piece (opening / closing door) of the variable prize winning device (large prize opening) applies a relatively large force by the solenoid during the first drive. Therefore, the solenoid is driven with a pulse with a duty of 100% for 200 ms immediately after the start, and then switched to a pulse with a duty of 60% to 80%.

In addition, when the weight of the movable piece (opening / closing door) is different between the lower prize winning opening 38 and the upper prize winning opening 39, the big winning prize opening having a heavy moving piece is driven by a pulse with a duty of 80%. The large winning opening having a small movable piece may be driven with a pulse having a duty of 60%.
Thus, wasteful power consumption can be reduced by changing the duty of the drive pulse of the solenoid.
The duty switching as described above can be performed by rewriting the setting value of the PWM control register in the CPU 111A. In this embodiment, the pulse period can also be set by the set value of the PWM control register. Instead of providing a dedicated register, a predetermined area of the RAM 111C may be used as a register area.

FIG. 109 shows the relationship between the set value of the PWM control register and the PWM output pulse. Among these, (A) shows the timing when the set value of the PWM control register is rewritten to change the pulse cycle from 1 ms to 2 ms. (B) shows the timing when the set value of the PWM control register is rewritten to switch the pulse duty from 100% to 60%.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, when the set value is changed during PWM output, the set value is reflected from the falling edge of the next cycle.
As shown in FIG. 110, the PWM control register is composed of 8 bits, in which bits 7 to 3 set the PWM output pulse cycle, and bits 2 to 0 set the PWM output pulse duty. It is configured as follows.
When the PWM output pulse cycle and the PWM output pulse duty are set, the PWM circuit in the output control circuit 149 (see FIG. 88) is activated.

In FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, by using the jackpot medium and large winning opening control address table used for setting the opening pattern and opening / closing time of the lower winning opening 38 and the upper winning opening 39, and the address obtained from the table. An example of the special winning opening opening / closing time table to be referred to is shown.
As shown in FIG. 111, the opening pattern of the big winning opening varies depending on the type of jackpot, and the pattern with a long opening time is executed by updating the control pointer. Specifically, the control pointer is updated in step A811 of the big prize opening opening process of FIG. 59, so that the control proceeds so as to proceed according to a predetermined opening pattern. 111 is set in step A781 of the solenoid information setting process of FIG. 56, and data of opening or closing is stored by referring to the table in step A782. An address for referring to the big prize opening / closing time table is acquired. Then, the opening control according to a predetermined opening pattern is executed by referring to the winning opening opening / closing time table using the acquired address, reading the set time and PWM output pulse data, and sequentially setting the data. It becomes.

More specifically, the lower major prize opening control 1 shown in FIG. 111 corresponds to 12R to 16R of the lower major prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 in FIG. Corresponding to 2R to 11R of patterns 1 to 3 and 12R to 16R of lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, the lower prize winning control 3 corresponds to 1R of lower winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3.
Similarly, the upper prize winning opening control 1 shown in FIG. 111 corresponds to 1R to 2R of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 and 3R to 16R of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 of FIG. The upper university winning opening control 2 corresponds to 2R to 16R of the upper winning opening / closing patterns 4 to 5, and the upper winning opening control 3 corresponds to 1R of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5, and the upper winning opening control 4 Corresponds to 1R of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described.
Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, a decorative lamp such as an LED or a speaker is provided around a game board having a game area, and a movable accessory driven by an electric lamp or a motor, a liquid crystal display device, or the like is provided at the center of the game board. A center case is often provided. Also, in this type of gaming machine, the player's response to the special result mode being derived in the variable display game by driving these electric lamps and movable accessories according to the progress of the game. There is something that has been directed to enhance expectations.

However, in the gaming machines as described above, in order to attract the player's interest, the number of decorative lamps is increased every time a new model is developed, or the operation of the movable accessory is complicated. Therefore, the power consumption of the entire gaming machine is increasing.
On the other hand, with the recent increase in social power saving, power consumption in gaming machines has become a problem. Even in amusement stores, interest in lowering power consumption is increasing, and reduction of power consumption in gaming machines is desired.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game control device 100 sends a power saving start command (power saving start command signal) or a power saving release command (power saving release command signal) to the effect control device 300 based on establishment of a predetermined condition. It is supposed to send. Details of the predetermined condition will be described later.
Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the game control device 100 can be connected to a game hall management device (information collection device, so-called hall computer) H installed in the game store, at the first input port 123 of the input unit 120. It is possible. In a state where the game hall management device H is connected to the port 123, various control signals (power-saving control signals, etc.) output from the game hall management device H are input to the game microcomputer 111 via the first input port 123. It becomes possible to do. The control signal from the game hall management device H may be input via the external information terminal 171.

On the other hand, the production control device 300 has a power saving function of controlling to drive with less power consumption by reducing the power supplied to the various decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45. Specifically, when a power saving start command is received from the game control device 100 while the power saving control signal received from the game hall management device H is at a high level, the power saving function is turned on and consumed by various decoration devices. As the applied power decreases, the decoration mode of the decoration device changes to a predetermined power saving decoration mode. On the other hand, when the received power saving control signal goes low or a power saving cancel command is received, the power saving function is turned off, the amount of power supplied to the various decoration devices returns to the normal supply amount, and The aspect returns to the non-power saving decoration aspect.
When the power saving control signal is received only by the game control device 100, the power saving function is turned on (off) only by receiving the power saving start (cancel) command.

Here, the decoration mode is a volume or melody, etc., if the decoration device is a sound output device, a symbol or background displayed if it is a display device, brightness (luminance) of the display unit, etc. If there is a movable accessory such as (brightness), lighting time, flashing pattern, etc. (hereinafter, the decoration mode may be referred to as the operation mode only for the movable role) It is a position, a moving direction, a moving distance, a moving speed, etc.
In this embodiment, if the decoration device is the display device 41, the display unit 41a is darkened (decreases the brightness), and if the speakers 19a and 19b are not output, the sound is not output (the volume level is set to 0). In the case of the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 42, a state in which some or all of the built-in LEDs are turned off is turned off, and in the case of the board effect device 44 or the frame effect device 45, the operation of the movable accessory is stopped. It is an aspect. If power consumption is reduced, sound output at a low volume, LED light emission at a low luminance, and movement of a movable accessory at a low speed or a short distance may be used as a power saving decoration mode. Hereinafter, a state in which the power consumption of the decoration device decreases and the decoration mode of the decoration device becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode is referred to as a power saving state.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is configured to be able to select a part of the decoration device to enter a power saving state. In this embodiment, using this function, the display device 41 is not put into the power saving state even when the power saving function is turned on, and only the other decoration devices are put into the power saving state. At this time, on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, an image (for example, “power saving” character or the like) for notifying the player that the gaming machine 10 is in the power saving state is displayed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs light emission luminance control of the decoration device based on a signal from the brightness sensor 20 as illuminance detection means provided on the front surface of the glass frame 15. Specifically, when a predetermined range of illuminance is not detected by the brightness sensor 20 (when the brightness in the amusement store is dark), a power saving state is generated to reduce the light emission luminance for effects by various decoration devices. When a predetermined range of illuminance is detected by the brightness sensor 20 (when the brightness in the amusement store is bright), the generated power saving state is canceled or even if a power saving control signal is input, the power saving state is not entered. Control is performed so as not to decrease the light emission luminance of the decoration device. As a result, it is possible to provide a function for actively generating a power saving state to an amusement shop with a high awareness of power saving, and light emission of the decoration device according to the arrangement environment of the gaming machine, that is, the brightness in the amusement shop. Brightness control can be performed.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is configured not to generate a power saving state when a detection signal from the non-contact sensor 47 provided on the right side of the center case 40 is input. In this embodiment, since the brightness sensor 20 and the non-contact sensor 47 are disposed relatively close to each other, the amount of light entering the brightness sensor 20 is reduced when the player holds his / her hand over the non-contact sensor 47. This is to prevent the control device from erroneously determining that the ambient illuminance has decreased and generating a power saving state.
When the detection signal from the non-contact sensor 47 is input, the brightness sensor 20 and the non-contact sensor 47 are arranged at positions apart from each other instead of not changing the light emission luminance of the decoration device. When the non-contact sensor 47 is provided on the right side of the center case 40, the brightness sensor 20 may be provided on the left side or upper part of the front surface of the glass frame 15. Thereby, when the hand is held over the non-contact sensor 47, the brightness sensor 20 can be hardly affected.

Further, when the player holds his / her hand over the non-contact sensor 47, the light emission luminance of the decoration device may be positively changed based on the signal from the brightness sensor 20. Thereby, when the player holds his hand over the non-contact sensor 47, it is possible to give the player a sense that the gaming machine is reacting.
In this embodiment, the non-contact sensor 47 is provided, but a contact sensor may be used instead of the non-contact sensor.
Further, in this embodiment, the brightness sensor 20 is provided to reduce the light emission luminance for production by various decoration devices by generating a power saving state when the predetermined range of illuminance is not detected. A sound sensor for detecting the volume of the surrounding sound may be provided so that the sound generated by the speaker is lowered when the surrounding sound is low. If the surrounding sound is low, it is not difficult to hear even if the volume of the speaker is lowered. On the other hand, reducing the volume of the speaker can reduce the power consumption of the speaker and increase the power saving effect.
Further, when the brightness sensor 20 is provided and a predetermined range of illuminance is detected (when the brightness in the amusement store is bright), a power saving state is generated, and the brightness sensor 20 is provided and the predetermined range of illuminance is detected. The power saving state may not be canceled or generated when it is not (when the brightness in the game store is dark).

FIG. 114 shows the configuration of an effect control device 300 as effect control means in the second embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1stCPU 311, and the display device 41 according to commands and data from the 2ndCPU 312. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b are provided. Yes.

The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images, video data, and command lists, and the sound source LSI 314 stores compressed audio data, sequences necessary for phrase reproduction processing, command sequences for simple access, and the like. A ROM 324 is connected.
The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. The RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided inside each chip, but may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultrahigh-speed VRAM (video RAM) 305 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a drawing circuit for drawing image data. 306, a display circuit 308 for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided. The VDP 313 will be described in detail later.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the front frame and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives the effect control command transmitted from the game control device 100. A variation start command, a customer waiting demonstration command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, an error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are used as an effect control command signal. Receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.
In the present embodiment, the effect control command is composed of 16 bits, and the 16-bit effect control command is transmitted as the 8-bit data bus and the strobe signal SSBT. ) And the latter half command (ACTION), the strobe signal SSBT is transmitted by rising twice, and the receiving side takes in the command in synchronization with the rising edge of the SSB.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 42 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and provided on the front frame. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes), and a board effect device provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 that drives and controls (for example, a decorative accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41), a frame effect device such as an LED or a motor provided on the front frame A frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling 45 (for example, a motor of the moving light 16) is provided. Note that these control circuits 332 to 335 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 304.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a signal from the brightness sensor 20 provided on the right front surface of the glass frame 15, an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12, and the above-mentioned panel effect. Main control is performed on the detection signal of the on / off state of the stage effect switch 44a for detecting the initial position of the motor in the device 44, the signal from the volume adjustment switch 29, and the signal from the non-contact sensor 47 on the right side of the center case 40. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting to the microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 for the game, an external input circuit 338 for inputting a signal from the game hall management apparatus H to the microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 for the main control, and an upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12 are provided. An amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier to be driven and a speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12 are provided. Amplifier circuit 337b is provided for moving. Among these, the detection signal of the effect button switch 25a includes a push button detection signal, a select button detection signal, and a touch sensor detection signal.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving an LED or a speaker, or a standard for these DC voltages, It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S58) in the timer interrupt process described above executed in the gaming machine to which the third embodiment is applied will be described.
In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted and Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. Next, a count switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this count switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, the special figure game process timer is updated (-1) to check whether or not the game process timer has expired (step A3), and the special figure game process timer has expired (step A4; If the determination is Yes), a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to a process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (step A5), and the special figure game is used using the table. A process (step A6) of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the process number is performed. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. Details of this special figure routine processing will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step A8, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process is performed. (Step A10) is performed.

In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, a fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of big hit (2R big hit or 16R big hit) Special chart display processing (step A11) for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot (2R jackpot or 16R jackpot), setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Do.
In step A8, when the game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A12) is performed.

In step A8, if the game process number is “4”, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while a big hit end screen command is set if the big round is the final round, A large winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the winning opening remaining ball processing is performed.
If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Thereafter, each data of the table prepared by the branch process is saved in the work area of the RWM (step A16). And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A17), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A18) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A17, and the subsequent processes are performed.
By performing such processing, the special figure variation display game is executed on the collective display device 50 and the display device 41. That is, the game control device 100 functions as a variable display game execution unit that executes a variable display game that displays predetermined identification information in a variable manner.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 116, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step A301). Here, when it is determined that the number of second special figure hold is not 0 (step A302; No), a special figure 2 variation start process (step A303) is performed, and a table (first figure) for shifting to the special figure variation process is performed. 2 (for special figure) (step A304), specifically, in the table, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, the first special figure Test signal during fluctuation, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 (for example, flag relating to fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, blinking of the special figure 1 display 51 The initial value of the timer of the period and the like is set, and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  In step A302, when it is determined that the second special figure hold number is 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether or not the first special figure hold number (first start memory number) is zero ( Step A305). Here, when it is determined that the number of first special figure hold is not 0 (step A306; No), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the process proceeds to the special figure fluctuation process. A process for preparing a table (for the first special figure) (step A308) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In this way, the second special figure hold number in step A301 and step A302 is checked before the first special figure hold number check in step A303 and step A304, so that the second special figure hold number is zero. If not, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A311) is executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

  If it is determined in step A306 that the first special figure hold number is 0 (step A306; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving control signal is high (step A309). If it is determined that the power saving control signal is high (step A309; Yes), the usual game process number is checked (step A310). Here, when it is determined that the normal game process number indicates that the normal map normal process is being executed (step A311; Yes), it is checked whether or not the normal map hold number is zero. (Step A312). Here, when it is determined that the number of ordinary drawings on hold is 0 (step A313; Yes), an error state of the gaming machine is acquired (step A314). Here, when the acquired information indicates that an error state has not occurred in the gaming machine (step A315; Yes), the touch detection signal of the touch sensor 24a of the operation unit 24 is checked, and the high level is checked. It is determined whether or not there has been a change from low to low or low to high (step A316). Here, when it is determined that the touch detection signal has changed (step A317; Yes), the processing after step A318 is performed.

  When it is determined in step A309 that the power saving control signal is low (step A309; No), it is determined in step A311 that the normal game process number does not indicate that the normal process is being executed. In the case (step A311; No), when it is determined in step A313 that the number of pending drawings is not 0 (step A313; No), the information acquired in step A315 indicates that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine. If it is a thing (step A315; No), if it is determined in step A317 that there is no change in the touch detection signal (step A317; No), a process for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure routine process (step A322), specifically, in the table, the process number “0” related to the special figure routine process , The flag which defines the special winning opening unauthorized monitoring period by performing the process of setting the (winning opening the fraud audit information) and the like, and ends the special symbol usually processing.

  In step A318, it is determined whether the touch detection signal has changed from high to low or from low to high. When it is determined that the touch detection signal has changed from high to low, that is, the player has released his hand from the operation unit 24 (a predetermined portion of the gaming machine) (step A318; No), the power saving function is turned on. A power saving start command for instructing the effect control device is prepared (step A319), command setting processing is performed (step A321), and the process proceeds to step A322. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power saving control signal received from the game hall management device H is high, there is no hold on both the special figure and the usual figure (the game is stopped), and there is an error in the gaming machine 10 Satisfying the fact that no state has occurred and that the player has released his / her hand from the operation unit 24 is “satisfaction of power saving start condition” for generating a power saving state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A318 that the touch detection signal has changed from low to high, that is, the player has touched the operation unit 24 (step A318; Yes), an instruction to turn off the power saving function is given. A power saving cancellation command is prepared (step A320), command setting processing is performed (step A321), and the process proceeds to step A322.

When the game control device 100 executes such processing, a power saving start command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when all the predetermined conditions are satisfied, and power saving is canceled when at least one of the above conditions is not satisfied. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as a release operation detecting means for detecting a predetermined release operation by the player, and an operation contact detecting means for monitoring whether or not the player has touched a predetermined location of the gaming machine, and also displays a variable display. A function of transmitting a power-saving start command signal to the effect control means 300 when the game execution means 100 is not executing the variable display game and it is not detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10; When a predetermined power saving start condition is established, a predetermined power saving start command signal is transmitted, and when a predetermined release operation is detected by the release operation detecting means, a predetermined power saving release command signal is transmitted to the effect control means. Corresponding to the operation contact detection means detecting that the function has changed from a contact state where the predetermined part is in contact with the player to a non-contact state where the player is not in contact with the player, A function of transmitting a power saving release command signal to the effect control means in response to the operation contact detection means detecting that the power contact start command signal has been transmitted to the effect control means while changing from the non-contact state to the contact state. Will have.
Note that a power saving start command may be transmitted when not all of the predetermined conditions are satisfied but some of them are satisfied.

The game control device 100 performs the above-described various controls (timer interrupt processing to special figure normal processing), thereby monitoring the fraudulent act on the variable display game and the gaming machine 10 and the game proceeds. . Therefore, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means for managing the progress of the game.
Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 114, the effect control apparatus 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311. .

[1st CPU main processing]
The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs 1st CPU main processing shown in FIG. In this 1st CPU main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. The processing at the start of the program is performed after a predetermined return operation (power-on, reset operation after power-on, etc.). First, interrupts are prohibited (step B11), and the RAM is cleared to 0 (step B12), CPU initialization processing (step B13) for initializing the CPU is performed. Next, initial values of the built-in RAM 311a and FeRAM 315 are set (step B14), random number initialization processing (step B15) for initializing random numbers is performed, various timers are started (step B16), and interrupts are permitted. (Step B17).

  Next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In the processing of this loop, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B18), and effect button input processing (step B19) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 251 is performed. . Next, a game control command analysis process (step B20) is performed. In this game control command analysis process (step B20), it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 has been correctly received. Processing to classify commands for processing.

  Next, a test mode process (step B21) which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decoration devices 18 and 42, the rendering devices 44 and 45, and the like is performed. When the test mode is set by the test mode process (step B21), the subsequent game-related processes are not performed. However, in the test mode, when the display on the display device 41, the output of sound from the speaker, the light emission of the LEDs of the decoration devices 18 and 42, the operation of the effect devices 44 and 45, etc. are performed, in the process for controlling these Take control. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine is powered off.

Then, the first scene control process related to the control of the game effect is performed (step B22), and the gaming machine error monitoring process is performed (step B23). In this gaming machine error monitoring process, whether or not an error condition has occurred in the gaming machine 10 is monitored, and when it is detected that an error condition has occurred, a process for notifying that is performed. Specifically, an abnormality such as a predetermined event (for example, an unauthorized operation by an inserted foreign object or an impact or vibration having a strength higher than a predetermined level) applied to various devices managed by the game control device 100 ) When an error notification command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received, or similar events in various devices managed by the effect control device 300 (not directly managed by the game control device 100) When it is detected that an abnormality (an abnormality different from the abnormality detected by the game control means) has occurred, a process for changing the decoration mode of each decoration device to an error notification mode is performed.
Further, after detecting that the error state has occurred, it is monitored whether or not the error state has been settled, and when the error state has been settled (in the case of an error detected by the game control device 100, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the settlement). The process for changing the decoration mode of each decoration device from the error notification mode to the error non-notification mode is performed.

  When the effect control device 300 executes such a process, the game machine 10 is notified of any error state. Therefore, the production control device 300 detects an abnormality by detecting an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine 10 based on a function for detecting an abnormality different from the abnormality detected by the game control means 100 or a predetermined event. In this case, it has a function of monitoring whether or not the abnormality has been resolved.

  Next, effect command editing processing for editing a command output to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 is performed (step B24). The video control microcomputer 312 performs display control of the display device 41 based on the command edited in this process. For example, processing for changing the luminance of the backlight 411, processing for displaying an image indicating that power saving or an error state is occurring, etc. are performed on the display unit 41a.

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step B25) is performed. In this sound control process, control related to the sound output of the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) is performed. For example, processing for outputting sound at the volume level set by the volume control unit, processing for setting the output volume level of the speakers 19a and 19b to “0” when the power saving function is turned on, and error When the state occurs, the output volume level of the speakers 19a and 19b is changed to the maximum value regardless of the set value, and processing for transmitting a command for instructing the output of the error notification sound is performed.

  When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b according to the state of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, when the production control device 300 detects the function of controlling the sound volume output from the sound output device based on the setting state of the sound volume setting means or the occurrence of an abnormality in the gaming machine, the effect control device 300 notifies the abnormality. The sound output device has a function of outputting the sound to be output at a predetermined volume that is not based on the setting state of the volume setting means.

  Next, a decoration control process for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 18 (step B26), a motor / SOL control process for controlling the motors and solenoids of the panel effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 (step) B27) is performed. In the decoration control process and the motor / SOL control process, various decoration devices are set in a predetermined decoration mode based on a control command from the game control device 100, on / off of a power saving function, presence / absence of a temporary release flag, presence / absence of an error state, etc. The process for controlling to operate in is performed. Then, a random number update process (step B28) for updating the random number for determining details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game, a power saving execution setting process (step B29) for setting on / off of the power saving function is performed, and WDT is performed. Return to the process of clearing (step B18).

  When the effect control device 300 executes the processes as in steps B24 to B27, the decoration modes of the various decoration devices change as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect control device 300 is based on the effect control means for controlling the decoration mode (operation mode, output mode) of the decoration device (movable body device, sound output device) and the reception of the power saving start command signal. A power saving state in which the power consumed in the device (movable body device, sound output device) is reduced, and the decoration mode (operation mode) of the decoration device (movable accessory) becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode (power saving operation mode) And a power-saving control means for controlling to release the power-saving state based on the reception of the power-saving release command signal and notifying that the abnormality is occurring in the gaming machine in the decoration mode of the decoration device It has the function to change to the abnormality alerting mode.

[Power saving execution setting process]
Next, details of the power saving execution setting process (step B29) in the first CPU main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the power saving execution setting process, first, the state of the power saving function is acquired (step B201). If it is determined that the power saving function is turned on (step B202; Yes), the process proceeds to step B214 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving function is turned off (step B202; No), a temporary release flag indicating that the power saving function is turned on but the power saving state is temporarily released is set. It is determined whether or not (step B203). If it is determined that the temporary release flag is set (step B203; Yes), the process proceeds to step B214. On the other hand, when it determines with the temporary cancellation | release flag not being set (step B203; No), it progresses to step B204.

  In step B204, it is determined whether or not the power saving control signal is high. If it is determined that the power saving control signal is low (step B204; No), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving control signal is high (step B204; Yes), the occurrence status of various error states is acquired (step B205). If it is determined that some kind of error has occurred (step B206; Yes), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that no error state has occurred (step B206; No), the process proceeds to step B207.

  In step B207, it is determined whether or not a start wait flag indicating a start wait period from when the power saving start command is received until the power saving function is turned on is set. If it is determined that the start wait flag is set (step B207; Yes), the process proceeds to step B211. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start wait flag is not set (step B207; No), it is determined whether or not a power saving start command is received from the game control device 100 (step B208). If it is determined that a power saving start command has not been received (step B208; No), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving start command has been received (step B208; Yes), a predetermined first timer value (Twait1) is set in the start wait timer (step B209), and a start wait flag is set (step B210), the process proceeds to step B211.

  In step B211, it is determined whether or not the start wait timer has expired. If it is determined that the start wait timer has not expired (step B211; No), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start wait timer has expired (step B211; Yes), a process for turning on the power saving function is performed (step B212), the start wait timer is cleared (step B213), and the power saving execution setting is set. The process ends.

  Referring to FIG. 119, in step B214, it is determined whether or not the power saving control signal is high. Here, if it is determined that the power saving control signal is low (step B214; No), the process proceeds to step B229. On the other hand, when it determines with a power-saving control signal being high (step B214; Yes), the state of pushbutton switch 251a, 252a is acquired (step B215). If it is determined that at least one of the effect button switch 251a and the selection button switch 252a has been input (predetermined release operation) (step B216; Yes), the process proceeds to step B229. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input in either the effect button switch 251a or the selection button switch 252a (step B216; No), the process proceeds to step B217.

  In step B217, the occurrence status of various error conditions is acquired. Here, when it is determined that some kind of error has occurred (step B218; Yes), a temporary release flag is set (step B219), and a process of turning off the power saving function is performed (step B220). The power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that no error state has occurred (step B218; No), it is determined whether or not a temporary release flag is set (step B221). If it is determined that the temporary release flag is not set (step B221; No), the process proceeds to step B224. On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary release flag is set (step B221; Yes), a process for turning on the power saving function is performed (step B222), the temporary release flag is cleared (step B223), and step B224 is performed. Proceed to

  In step B224, it is determined whether or not a release wait flag indicating a release wait period from when the power saving release command is received until the power saving function is turned off is set. If it is determined that the release wait flag is set (step B224; Yes), the process proceeds to step B228. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release wait flag is not set (step B224; No), it is determined whether or not a power saving release command is received from the game control device 100 (step B225). If it is determined that the power saving cancel command has not been received (step B225; No), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving cancellation command has been received (step B225; Yes), the second timer value (Twait2) smaller than the first timer value is set in the cancellation wait timer (step B226), and the cancellation wait flag is set. After setting (step B227), the process proceeds to step B228.

  In step B228, it is determined whether or not the release wait timer has expired. If it is determined that the release wait timer has not expired (step B228; No), the power saving execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release wait timer has timed out (step B228; Yes), processing for turning off the power saving function is performed (step B229), the release wait flag is cleared (step B230), and power saving execution setting is performed. The process ends.

  By performing the processing as described above, the decoration control device 300 enters the power saving state after the first predetermined time has elapsed since the power saving start condition is satisfied, and the second after the predetermined release operation is performed. The power saving state is released after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, when an error state occurs in the gaming machine 10, the error state of the decoration device is canceled during that time. Therefore, the effect control device 300 has a function of generating a power saving state based on the reception of a power saving control signal transmitted from the outside of the gaming machine, or that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine in the power saving state. If detected, the power-saving state is temporarily canceled until it is detected that the abnormality has been resolved, and the function of changing the decoration mode of the decoration device to the abnormality notification mode or the power-saving release command signal is received. In such a case, it has a function of canceling the power saving state in a time shorter than the time required to generate the power saving state after receiving the power saving start command signal.

Here, the power saving function is turned off when the push buttons 251 and 252 are pressed, but when a button other than the push buttons 251 and 252 (for example, the ball rental button 27) is pressed, The power saving function may be turned off when the setting of the volume control switch 29 is changed.
Also, when a power saving release command is received during the start wait period, the start wait timer and release wait flag are cleared so that the power saving function is kept off, and when a power saving start command is received during the release wait period. Alternatively, the release wait timer and the release wait flag may be cleared to continue the power saving function on state.
In addition, by setting the second timer value to 0, or by not performing the processing related to the release wait timer and the release wait flag, the power saving function can be immediately performed without waiting for a predetermined time after the power saving start condition is not satisfied. May be turned off.
Further, both the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are configured to monitor the power saving control signal, but the processing of either one (step A309 in the special figure normal processing or steps B232 and B233 in the main processing) is omitted. You may make it do.
In addition, the power saving state is canceled when a power saving cancellation command is received, but may be canceled when a command other than the power saving cancellation command is received from the game control device.

Next, the flow of the on / off operation of the power saving function of the gaming machine 10 will be described.
For example, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is connected to the game hall management device H and operates as shown in FIG. 119 in a state where the volume levels of the speakers 19a and 19b are set to “4”. Specifically, when a predetermined operation is performed on the game hall management device H, the power saving control signal output from the game hall management device H to the gaming machine 10 changes to high, and the power saving function is turned on. It becomes possible (power saving function is effective) (t1). The effective period of the power saving function may not be determined by the state (high / low) of the power saving control signal, but may be the period from when a predetermined start command is transmitted until the end command is transmitted.

  Thereafter, when a power saving start condition such as no hold or a player releasing his / her hand from the operation unit 24 is satisfied, a power saving start command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t2). Then, after the first predetermined time (Twait1) has elapsed, the power saving function is turned on, and the speakers 19a and 19b do not output sound (the volume level becomes “0”: t3). In addition, the decoration devices other than the speakers 19a and 19b are in the power saving state with the decoration mode set to the error non-notification mode.

  Here, when an error state occurs in the effect control device 300 or the device managed by the effect control device 300, the power saving function is immediately turned off, and the decoration device enters the non power saving state (t4). Then, a command instructing the output of the error notification sound is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, and the maximum volume level “4” is output from the speakers 19a and 19b regardless of the preset volume level “4”. 5 ", an error notification sound is output (t5). Further, the decoration mode of the decoration device other than the speakers 19a and 19b is changed from the error non-notification mode to the error notification mode (t5).

  When the generated error state is settled, the power saving function is turned on again, and the decoration device returns to the power saving state (t6). In addition, a command instructing the output stop of the error notification sound is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, and the speakers 19a and 19b do not output the sound again (t7). Further, the decoration mode of the decoration device other than the speakers 19a and 19b changes from the error notification mode to the error non-notification mode (t7).

  Here, when the power saving start condition is not satisfied, such as when the hold is stored or the player touches the operation unit 24, a power saving cancellation command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t8). The power saving function is turned off after the elapse of a second predetermined time (Twait 2) shorter than the first predetermined time, and the speakers 19a and 19b output sound at a volume level “4” (the volume level is set from the beginning). Return to “4”: t9). In addition, the decoration devices other than the speakers 19a and 19b enter a non-power-saving state with the decoration mode set to the error non-notification mode.

Incidentally, when an error state occurs in the game control device 100 or a device managed by the game control device 100, the gaming machine 10 operates as shown in FIG. Specifically, when an error state occurs, an error notification command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t14). Then, a command instructing the output of the error notification sound is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b (t15), and the error notification sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the volume level “5” ( t16).
When the generated error state is settled (t17), the state where the power saving function is turned off continues for the third predetermined time (Terror). After the third predetermined time has elapsed, the power saving function is turned on (t18), and the speakers 19a and 19b do not output sound (t19).
In this way, if a certain amount of time is allowed after the error state is settled before the decoration mode of the decoration device is returned to the error non-notification mode, the error state occurs again immediately after the error state is settled. It is possible to prevent the aspect from being changed frequently. Although the length of the third predetermined time is not particularly specified here, the third predetermined time (Terror) is set to be shorter than the first predetermined time (Twait1) as in the second predetermined time. May be.

(Modification 1)
Note that after an error state occurs during the power saving state and is settled, the power saving function may be kept off without being turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, after the third predetermined time (Terror) has elapsed since the error state has settled, the power saving function is not turned on, and the effect control device 300 sends an error sound to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b. A sound source LSI control command for instructing stop is transmitted (t38). Then, the sound volume level returns to “4” set from the beginning, and sound is output from the speakers 19 a and 19 b at the sound volume level “4” even before the power saving cancellation command is transmitted from the game control device 100. It becomes like this.

(Modification 2)
In addition, a power saving start command can be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 during the occurrence of an error state (excluding occurrence of an error state from a predetermined condition), and a power saving start command is transmitted during error notification. In such a case, the power saving function may not be activated. In other words, when the power saving start command signal is received from the game control means while the decoration mode of the decoration device is in the abnormality notification mode, the decoration mode of the decoration device is changed to the power saving decoration mode. You may make it give the function which continues an abnormality alerting | reporting aspect, without doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, when the power saving function is turned on and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a power saving release command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t41). After the first predetermined time (Twait1) has elapsed, the power saving function is turned off (t42). Here, when an error state occurs in the game control device 100 or the device managed by the game control device 100, an error notification command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t43). Then, the decoration mode of the decoration device changes from the error non-notification mode to the error notification mode (t44).

Here, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a power saving start command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t45), but since the error state is occurring, the state where the power saving function is turned off is continued.
When the generated error state is settled (t46), the state where the power saving function is turned off continues for the third predetermined time (Terror). After the third predetermined time elapses, the effect control device 300 transmits a sound source LSI control command that instructs the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b to stop the error sound (t47), and the speakers 19a and 19b output sound at the volume level “4”. (T48). On the other hand, the state where the power saving function is turned off continues until the power saving start command is transmitted again.
In the first and second modifications, the case where the error state is detected by the game control device 100 or the device managed by the game control device 100 is described as an example, but the effect control device 300 or the effect control device 300 manages the error state. A similar operation may be performed when an error state is detected by the apparatus.

(Modification 3)
Further, whether or not the power saving function can be turned on (whether the power saving function is enabled / disabled) is set not by the power saving control signal transmitted from the game hall management device H but by the volume setting. The volume may be determined based on the volume level set by the volume control switch 29 of the unit.
For example, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), a volume control switch 29 (volume levels that can be set here are 10 levels from “0” to “9”) 29 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 and is set only at the game store. to enable. When the volume level is set to any of “0” to “4”, the power saving function is enabled, and when the volume level is set to any of “5” to “9”, the power saving function is disabled. To. Then, the process of step A309 of the special figure normal process is changed to a process of determining whether or not the current set volume level is a value (“5” or more) that enables the power saving function.

In this way, the volume control and the power saving function can be set efficiently. In addition, a game store with a high power-saving consciousness that is set to a low volume on a daily basis can obtain a further power-saving effect.
In such a configuration, if the volume level is changed to “5” to “9” while the power saving state occurs, a power saving cancellation command is transmitted from the game control device, and the power saving state is canceled. When a command other than the cancel command is received, the command may be canceled.
Further, the power saving function may be disabled at volume levels “0” to “4”, and the power saving function may be enabled at volume levels “5” to “9”.

Also, the power saving function is not enabled when the volume level is low, and is not disabled when the volume level is high. For example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the even volume levels “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” The power saving function may be enabled when set to any of the above, and the power saving function may be disabled when set to any of the odd volume levels “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”.
In this way, the volume control and the power saving state can be set efficiently and finely.
A first volume control switch that can be operated only by a player is provided on the front of the gaming machine 10, and a second volume control switch that can be operated only by a store clerk is provided on the back of the gaming machine, so that the first volume control on the front is provided. Only the volume level can be set with the switch, and the power saving function can be enabled or disabled only with the second volume control switch on the back surface. In this case, the volume level that can be selected by the first volume control switch may be limited so that the volume level set by the second volume control switch becomes the upper limit.

Also, the order of the volume levels (numbers) of the volume control switch 29 is not simply set in ascending order or ascending order, but for example, as shown in FIG. Is reversed so that the volume levels “0” and “6”, “5” and “9” are adjacent to each other, and “9” which is the maximum volume and “0” which is the minimum volume are adjacent to each other. You may make it not.
In this way, for example, when the switch is turned counterclockwise and the volume level is changed from “0” to “9”, the output volume suddenly increases and the setter and the surrounding people are surprised. Can be prevented.

  According to the above, the effect control device 300 is consumed in the decoration device based on the reception of the power saving start command signal in a state where the sound output device is set to output at a predetermined sound volume by the sound volume setting means. Power saving state based on receiving a power saving cancellation command signal in a state where the power saving state is generated and the decoration mode of the decoration device becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode. It has the function to cancel.

  As described above, the game control means (game control device 100) included in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the effect control of a predetermined power saving start command signal (power saving start command) when a predetermined power saving start condition is satisfied. When the release operation detecting means (game control device 100) detects a predetermined release operation, a predetermined power saving release command signal (power saving release command) is sent to the effect control means 300. Thus, the effect control means 300 receives the power-saving start command signal, and the decoration device (the frame decoration device 18, the upper speaker 19a, the lower speaker 19b, the panel decoration device 42, the panel effect device 44, the frame effect). The power consumed in the device 45) is reduced, and the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode. When the power saving state is generated and the power saving cancellation command signal is received, control to release the power saving state is performed. When the power saving cancellation command signal is received, the power saving state is received after receiving the power saving start command signal. The power saving state is canceled in a time (Twait2) that is shorter than the time (Twait1) required for generation.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 that produce the game are in the power saving state, so that the game managed by the game control means 100 is used. The power consumption can be reduced without any influence.
In addition, if the player performs a predetermined release operation while the power saving state is occurring, the power saving state is released in a time shorter than the time required for the power saving state to be started after the predetermined condition is established. The player's willingness to resume the game as soon as possible can give an impression that it is reflected in the operation of the gaming machine 10 and prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the power saving function Can do.

  Further, the game control means 100 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment transmits a predetermined power saving start command signal to the effect control means 300 when a predetermined power saving start condition is satisfied, and performs a release operation of the predetermined release operation. When the detection means 300 detects, a predetermined power saving cancellation command signal is transmitted to the effect control means 300, and the effect control means 300 causes the sound output devices 19a and 19b to send the game effect sound to the predetermined sound volume by the sound volume setting means 29. The power consumption in the sound output devices 19a and 19b is reduced based on the reception of the power saving start command signal in a state where the sound output devices 19a and 19b are set to output, and the decoration mode of the sound output devices 19a and 19b is predetermined. Based on the fact that the power saving state that is the power saving decoration mode is generated and the power saving cancellation command signal is received, control to cancel the power saving state is performed, and the power saving cancellation command signal is transmitted. When receiving is a time shorter than the time required from receiving the power-saving start command signal until generating a power-saving state, so as to release the power saving state.

  For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the above effects, a power saving state can be generated when the sound output devices 19a and 19b are set to output at a predetermined volume. Functions can be set efficiently. In particular, if a power saving state can be generated at a low volume, a game store with a high power saving awareness that is set to a low volume on a daily basis can obtain a further power saving effect.

  In addition, the effect control means 300 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment reduces the power supplied to the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The decoration device 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 includes a power saving control means 300 for generating a power saving state in which a decoration mode of the decoration device 18 becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode. When an abnormality has been detected, if an abnormality is detected, whether or not the abnormality has been resolved is monitored. If it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10 in the power saving state, Until the cancellation is detected, the power saving state is temporarily cancelled, and the decoration of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 is abnormal in the gaming machine 10. The abnormality notifying mode for notifying that have been so varied.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is detected during the power saving control, the power saving state of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 is temporarily Since the abnormality is notified and the abnormality is notified, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player plays the game with the abnormal gaming machine 10 without notifying the abnormality.

Further, the power saving control means of the present embodiment is configured to generate a power saving state based on the fact that the power saving control means 300 receives a power saving control signal transmitted from the outside of the gaming machine 10.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting operation of whether or not the power saving state can be generated can be performed from the outside of the gaming machine 10, so that the game is performed in the target gaming machine 10. You can make settings while you are.
In addition, a system that transmits power-saving control signals to a plurality of gaming machines 10 from one setting operation means (for example, a game hall management device installed in a gaming store), and can simultaneously set the plurality of gaming machines 10 Can be built.

  In addition, the decoration device of the present embodiment includes sound output devices (speakers 19a and 19b) that can output sound, and the sound volume output by the sound output devices 19a and 19b is set by a predetermined operation of the player. The volume control means (volume control switch 29) is provided, and the effect control means 300 has a function of controlling the volume of the sound output from the sound output devices 19a and 19b based on the setting state of the volume setting means. When it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10, the sound output device 19a, 19b is made to output a sound for notifying the abnormality at a predetermined volume that is not based on the setting state of the volume setting means.

  For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, a sound for notifying the abnormality is output at a predetermined volume that is not based on the setting state of the volume setting means. Even if fraud is performed in a state where the output volume of 19a, 19b is lowered, it is possible to reliably notify the abnormality.

In addition, the game control means 100 of the present embodiment includes a variable display game execution means (game control device 100) for executing a variable display game that displays predetermined identification information in a variable manner, and based on a predetermined event, the gaming machine 10 When the abnormality is detected, and when the abnormality is detected, it is monitored whether or not the abnormality has been eliminated, and the game is not executed by the variable display game executing means 100 and the game is not executed. When it is not detected that an abnormality has occurred in the machine 10, a power saving start command signal is transmitted to the effect control means 300.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is not being executed and it has not been detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10, the effect control is performed from the gaming control means 100. Since the power saving start command signal for generating the power saving state is transmitted to the means 300, the power consumption can be reduced without affecting the game.

Further, in the decoration mode of the decoration device 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 of the present embodiment, an abnormality notification mode (error notification mode) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10. The production control means 300 detects an abnormality different from the abnormality detected by the game control means 100 and monitors whether or not the abnormality has been resolved when the abnormality is detected. When it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10, the power-saving state is temporarily canceled and the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42 are detected until it is detected that the abnormality has been resolved. , 44, 45 are changed to an abnormality notification mode.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the effect control unit 300 detects an abnormality different from the abnormality detected by the game control unit 100 during power saving control, Since the power saving states 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 are temporarily released and the abnormality is notified, the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified more reliably.

In addition, the effect control means 300 of the present embodiment is configured such that the power saving start command signal is sent from the game control means 100 while the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 is in the abnormality notification mode. Is received, the abnormality notification mode is continued without changing the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 to the power saving decoration mode.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the decorative devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 are not in a power saving state while the abnormality is being notified. The occurrence of an abnormality can be reliably notified until the abnormality is resolved.

  Further, the production control means 300 of the present embodiment is supplied to the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 based on the reception of the power saving start command signal transmitted from the game control means 100. The power saving state is reduced, and a power saving state is generated in which the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19 a, 19 b, 41, 42, 44, 45 becomes a predetermined power saving decoration mode and is transmitted from the game control means 100. And a power-saving control means 300 that performs control for releasing the power-saving state based on the reception of the command signal, and the game control means 100 executes a variable-display game that displays predetermined identification information in a variable manner. An execution means 100 is provided to detect whether an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10 based on a predetermined event, and whether the abnormality has been resolved when the abnormality is detected. And when the variable display game execution means 100 is not executing the variable display game and it is not detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10, the power saving start command signal is output to the effect control means 300. When the operation contact detection means (game control device 100) detects that the player has touched a predetermined location of the gaming machine 10, a power saving release command signal is sent to the effect control means 300. Yes.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is not being executed and it has not been detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10, the effect control is performed from the gaming control means 100. Since the power saving start command signal for generating the power saving state is transmitted to the means 300, the power consumption can be reduced without affecting the game.
In addition, when it is detected that the player has touched a predetermined part of the gaming machine 10, a power saving cancellation command signal for releasing the power saving state is transmitted from the game control means 100 to the effect control means 300. However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the power saving state is not released even though some operation is performed on the gaming machine 10.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the points changed in the present embodiment will be described.

  The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment can turn on the power saving function only when the power saving control signal received from the game hall management device H is high. In addition, the power saving function is turned on or off after a predetermined time (Twait1, Twait2) has elapsed since the production control device 300 received the power saving start command or the power saving release command from the game control device. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can (always) turn on the power saving function regardless of the reception status of the signal from the game hall management device H, and the game control device 100 can detect an error. A power saving start command or a power saving cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device after a predetermined time (Twait1, Twait2) has elapsed since the occurrence or error is eliminated, and the effect control device turns the power saving function on or off immediately after receiving the command. Yes. For this reason, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the control processing performed by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300.

[Special figure routine processing]
First, the changes in the special figure routine processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 125, in the special figure routine processing of this embodiment, the processing of step A309 is removed, the processing of step A319 is replaced with the processing of steps A323 and A324, and the processing of step A320 is replaced by steps A325 and A326. This is different from the process (see FIG. 116) of the second embodiment in that the process is replaced with a process and the process of step A327 is added before the process of step A322. That is, when it is determined in step A306 that the number of first special figure hold is 0 (step A306; Yes), it is not determined whether the power saving control signal is high, and the normal game process number is not determined. The process proceeds to the process of checking (Step A310). Further, when it is determined in step A318 that the touch detection signal has changed from high to low, that is, the player has released his / her hand from the operation unit 24 (a predetermined portion of the gaming machine) (step A318; No), the power saving start is confirmed. A first timer value (Twait1) is set in the monitoring timer (step A323), and a power saving start confirmation monitoring flag is set (step A324). Then, power saving cancellation / power saving start confirmation monitoring processing (step A327) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A322. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A318 that the touch detection signal has changed from low to high, that is, the player has touched the operation unit 24 (step A318; Yes), the second timer value is set in the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring timer. (Twait2) is set (step A325), a power saving start confirmation monitoring flag is set (step A326), and the process proceeds to step A327.

[Power saving cancellation / power saving start confirmation monitoring process]
In the power saving cancellation / power saving start confirmation monitoring process (step A327) in the above-described special figure routine processing, first, as shown in FIG. 126, it is determined whether or not the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring flag is set (step A331). Here, when it is determined that the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring flag is not set (step A331; No), the process proceeds to step A335. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring flag is set (step A331; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring timer is 0 (step A332). If it is determined that the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring timer is 0 (step A332; Yes), a power saving cancellation command is prepared (step A333), and the process proceeds to step A335. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring timer is not 0 (step A332; No), the power saving cancellation confirmation monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step A334), and the process proceeds to step B335.

  In step A335, it is determined whether or not a power saving start confirmation monitoring flag is set. If it is determined that the power saving start confirmation flag is not set (step A335; No), a command setting process (step A339) is performed, and the power saving cancellation / power saving start confirmation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving start confirmation monitoring flag is set (step A335; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving start confirmation monitoring timer is 0 (step A336). If it is determined that the power saving start confirmation monitoring timer is 0 (step A336; Yes), a power saving start command is prepared (step A337), and the process proceeds to step A339. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving start confirmation monitoring timer is not 0 (step A336; No), the power saving start confirmation monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step A338), and the process proceeds to step A339.

A first predetermined time has elapsed since the game control device 100 executes the above special figure normal processing and the power saving cancellation / power saving start confirmation monitoring processing to detect an abnormality in the game control device 100 or various devices managed by the game control device. A power saving start command is transmitted later, and a power saving cancellation command is transmitted after a second predetermined time has elapsed since the error was resolved. Therefore, when the detection by the operation contact detection unit changes from the non-contact state to the contact state, the game control apparatus 100 changes the detection by the operation contact detection unit from the contact state to the non-contact state, and then the power saving start command signal. Thus, it has a function of starting the transmission of the power saving cancellation command signal in a time shorter than the time required to transmit.
It is not always possible to generate a power-saving state, and as in the second embodiment, when the power-saving control signal received from the game hall management device H is high or the volume control switch is at a predetermined volume level. The power saving state may be generated only when the

[Power saving execution setting process]
Although illustration is omitted, in the power saving execution setting process of the present embodiment, the process related to the setting / clearing of the start wait flag and the release wait flag, and the process related to setting and counting of the start wait timer and the release wait timer are not performed. Yes. That is, the process for turning on the power saving function is performed immediately after receiving the power saving start command from the game control apparatus 100, and the process for turning off the power saving function is performed immediately upon receiving the power saving release command.

  As described above, the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) included in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has received the power saving start command signal (power saving start command) transmitted from the game control means (game control apparatus 100). Accordingly, the power consumed in the decoration device (the frame decoration device 18, the upper speaker 19a, the lower speaker 19b, the panel decoration device 42, the panel effect device 44, and the frame effect device 45) is reduced, and the decoration device 18 is used. , 19 a, 19 b, 41, 42, 44, 45 have generated a power saving state in which the decoration mode is a predetermined power saving mode, and received a power saving cancellation command signal (power saving cancellation command) transmitted from the game control means 100 Based on the above, the control for canceling the power saving state is performed, and when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 10 in the power saving state, the abnormality has been resolved. The game control means 100 is configured to temporarily cancel the power-saving state until the detection of, and to change the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 to the abnormality notification mode. In response to the fact that the operation contact detection means 100 has detected that the player has changed from a contact state where the player is in contact with a predetermined location to a non-contact state where the player is not in contact, a power saving start command signal is produced. While transmitting to the control means 300, in response to the operation contact detection means 100 detecting the change from the non-contact state to the contact state, a power saving release command signal is transmitted to the effect control means 300 to detect the operation contact When the means 100 detects a change from the non-contact state to the contact state, the operation contact detection means 100 sends a power saving start command signal after detecting the change from the contact state to the non-contact state. In less time than the time required until the, so that starts transmission of power saving cancellation command signal.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 that produce the game are in the power saving state, so that the game managed by the game control means 100 is used. The power consumption can be reduced without any influence.
Further, when an abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is detected during the power saving control, the power saving state of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 is temporarily released, and the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b. , 41, 42, 44, 45 change to the abnormality notification mode, so that the player can be surely recognized that an abnormality has occurred, and there is an abnormality without notification of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player plays a game on a gaming machine.

In addition, even during the power saving control, the effect control means 300 detects an abnormality different from the abnormality detected by the game control means 100, so that the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 Since the power saving state is temporarily canceled and the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 are changed to the abnormality notification mode, the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified more reliably.
Furthermore, if the player performs a predetermined release operation while the power saving state is occurring, the power saving state is released in a time shorter than the time required from the establishment of the power saving start condition until the power saving state is started. The player's desire to resume the game as soon as possible during the occurrence can give the impression that it is reflected in the operation of the gaming machine 10 and prevents the player from being dissatisfied with the power saving function be able to.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 139. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the points changed in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power saving function is turned on, the display device 41 is not put into the power saving state, and the decoration device is in the power saving state on the display unit 41a (for example, “during power saving”). ) Was only displayed. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to put all the decoration devices including the display device 41 into a power saving state, and further displays in accordance with the variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game. The degree of power saving of the device 41 is changed. In the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 38 also has a power saving function. For this reason, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the configuration of the game board 30 and the game control device 100 and the control processing performed by the effect control device 300.

First, the changes in the game board 30 will be described.
The game board 30 of the present embodiment includes a movable body device 80 as shown in FIG. The movable body device 80 includes a first drive motor 81 attached to a predetermined portion (right side here) of the center case 40 (not shown) so that the rotation shaft is perpendicular to the board surface, and the rotation shaft of the first drive motor 81. And a support part 82 that rotates along the surface of the board by the rotation of the rotation shaft, and an initial position that is provided at the tip of the support part 82 and does not shield the display part 41a of the display device 41 (here, above the display part 41a) ) And a shielding position that shields the display unit 41a (in front of the display unit 41a, a predetermined position other than the initial position) and a movable accessory 83 movable while drawing an arc centering on the rotation axis, A first position detection sensor 84 that outputs a position detection signal to the effect control device 300 when the accessory 83 is in the initial position.
The movable body device 80 may have any configuration as long as the movable body device 80 can be changed between a state where the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is shielded and a state where the display unit 41a is not shielded.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the movable accessory 83 is attached to the rotary shaft by a second drive motor 85 supported by the support portion 82 so that the rotary shaft thereof is perpendicular to the board surface. A second position detection sensor 87 that outputs a position detection signal to the effect control device 300 when the rotating plate 86 rotated by the rotation and the protrusion 86a formed on the back surface of the rotating plate 86 are at the initial position (opposite positions). And consist of When the protrusion 86a is at the position shown in FIG. 33B, the rotating plate 86 is in the state shown by the broken line in FIG.

Next, changes in the game control device 100 will be described.
In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, a PWM output circuit (not shown) is provided in the driver 138a that drives the winning prize opening, and the opening / closing operation of the open / close door 38c can be performed with low power consumption. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 38c is opened for a long time as in the case of 16R big hit, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), from the start of opening / closing of the opening / closing door 38c to the opening state. (T51 to t52, t55 to t56) and the period from the start of closing of the open / close door 38c to the closed state (t53 to t54, t57 to t58), a large amount of normal power consumption (for example, duty ratio 100%) is large. The winning opening solenoid 38b is excited and the solenoid is excited with low power consumption (for example, duty ratio 50%) while the open / close door 38c is in an open state (t52 to t53, t56 to t57). On the other hand, when the open / close door 38c is opened for a short time as in the case of 2R big hit, as shown in FIG. The solenoid 38b is excited.
It should be noted that instead of exciting only the special winning opening solenoid 38b with low power consumption, it is also possible to excite only the main power solenoid 37c or both with low power consumption.

Although a specific description is omitted in the second embodiment, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100 has both the second embodiment and the present embodiment as shown in FIGS. Short fluctuation (variation time 4 seconds), normal fluctuation (10 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (30 seconds), special 1 reach A, B (60 seconds), special 2 reach A, B (90 seconds) A variation pattern table including eight types of variation patterns of special 3 reach (120 seconds) is stored. The content of each variation pattern is set so that the reliability indicating the likelihood of being a big hit given to the player is different (in this case, the reliability increases as the variation pattern has a longer variation time). ing.
Each variation pattern has a different number of distributions depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game and the number of special figure holds when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. Are different. For example, when the result is out of order, the normal reach distribution number is 100 (selection probability 10%) if the number of holds is 1 to 3, and 50 (selection probability 5%) if it is 4, and the result is a big hit The special 2 reach allocation number is 300 (selection probability 30%) regardless of the number of holds.

  By setting the variation pattern table as described above, the variation mode includes the first variation mode, the second variation mode having higher reliability than the first variation mode, the first variation mode, and the second variation mode. Therefore, the game control apparatus 100 increases the possibility that a special result will be derived. This means that a variation mode selection means for selecting, as a variation mode of the variation display game, one variation mode from a plurality of variation modes set so that the reliability shown is different.

Next, changes in the production control device 300 will be described.
The video control microcomputer 312 of the presentation control device 300 according to the present embodiment can cause the PWM output circuit 308 to output five types of pulse waves having different widths. That is, as a light emission mode of the backlight 411, five types of a normal mode and power saving modes 1 to 4 are set as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the duty ratio of the pulse wave output from the PWM output circuit 306 is set to 100% (always on), the light emission mode of the backlight 411 is a normal mode, and the display device as shown in FIG. A bright and clear image is displayed on the display unit 41a. Further, when the duty ratio of the pulse wave is set to 80%, 50%, and 20%, the light emission modes are the power saving mode 1, the power saving mode 2, and the power saving mode 3, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 130 (d) to (f). The display part 41a becomes dim compared to the normal mode. Further, when the duty ratio of the pulse wave is set to 0%, the light emission mode is the power saving mode 4 (off), and nothing is displayed on the display unit 41a as shown in FIG. 130 (g) (becomes a non-display state). .

  In addition, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 according to the present embodiment stores a power saving control table for associating the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game with the light emission mode of the backlight 411. Then, the main control microcomputer 311 extracts a random number for determining the light emission mode, and determines the light emission mode of the backlight 411 by referring to the value in the power saving control table. Therefore, the production control device 300 serves as a luminance control means capable of executing luminance reduction control for reducing the luminance of the display unit 41a in association with the progress of the variable display game.

FIG. 131 (a) is a power saving control table 1 used when the special figure variation display game is lost. When the display device 41 is in a normal mode (no power saving), the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100% if the variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the normal mode is selected with a probability of 30% if the normal variation is a normal reach. The power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 60% and the power saving mode 2 with a probability of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is special 1 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 60%, and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 40%. If the variation pattern is special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. Is done.
When the display device 41 is in the power saving mode 1, if the variation pattern is a shortened variation, the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 100%, and if the variation pattern is a normal variation normal reach, the power saving modes 1 and 30 with a probability of 70%. The power saving mode 2 is selected with a probability of%. If the fluctuation pattern is special 1 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 60%, and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 40%. If the variation pattern is special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. Is done.

When the display device 41 is in the power saving mode 2, the power saving mode 2 is selected with a probability of 100% if the variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the power saving modes 1 and 40 with a probability of 60% if the normal variation is normal reach. The power saving mode 2 is selected with a probability of%. If the variation pattern is special 1 reach, the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and the power saving mode 2 is selected with a probability of 40%. If the variation pattern is special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. Selected.
It should be noted that the current light-emission mode is the power-saving mode 3 or 4 (when the special figure variation display game is not being performed or not being operated, etc.), it is not defined in the power-saving control table 1. This is because the gaming machine 10 is always operated before the special figure variation display game is executed (the light emission mode of the display device 41 is changed to the power saving modes 1 and 2).

  When the effect control device 300 determines the power saving mode using the power saving control table 1, the current power saving mode is maintained when the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a short variation with a short variation time. The luminance of the display unit 41a does not decrease. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to frequent changes in luminance and the player's eyes from getting tired. In addition, when the variation pattern is a special 1 reach with high reliability, a light emission mode with a high probability is selected, and when a variation pattern is a special 2 or 3 reach, a light emission mode with a lower luminance than the current state is selected. Nothing will happen. For this reason, a player's expectation with respect to the fluctuation | variation with high reliability can be raised more effectively. Therefore, in the variable display game in which no special result is derived, the effect control device 300 has a function that enables execution of luminance reduction control, a function that does not execute luminance reduction control when the second variation mode is selected, When the mode selection unit selects the shortened variation mode, the mode selection unit has a function of not performing the luminance reduction control.

FIG. 131 (b) shows the power saving control table 2 used when the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. Regardless of whether the light emission mode of the display device 41 is the normal mode or the power saving modes 1 and 2, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100% if the variation pattern is equal to or greater than the normal reach.
When the effect control device 300 determines the power saving mode by using the power saving control table 2, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, the normal mode is always selected and the luminance of the display unit 41a is increased. Maintained or risen. For this reason, whether or not a special result is derived in the variable display game can be notified in advance by the light emission mode of the backlight. Therefore, the effect control device 300 has a function of not executing the brightness reduction control in the variable display game from which the special result is derived.

  Note that, in the case of a big hit in the special figure variation display game, the power saving control table 2 may be changed as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the display device 41 is in the normal mode (no power saving), if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the normal mode has a probability of 70%, the power saving mode 1 has a probability of 10%, and the probability of 20%. The power saving mode 2 is selected. If the fluctuation pattern is special 1 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 90%, and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 10%. If the variation pattern is a special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. To be.

When the display device 41 is in the power saving mode 1, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 70% and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 30%. If the fluctuation pattern is special 1 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 80%, and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 20%. If the variation pattern is special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. To be.
When the display device 41 is in the power saving mode 2, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 70% and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 30%. If the fluctuation pattern is special 1 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 80%, and the power saving mode 1 is selected with a probability of 20%. If the variation pattern is special 2, 3 reach, the normal mode is selected with a probability of 100%. To be.

  When the power saving mode is determined using the changed power saving control table 2, when the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is normal reach or special 1 reach, the light emission mode having high luminance is selected with high probability, and the special 2, In the case of 3 reach, a light emission mode having a lower luminance than the current level is not selected. For this reason, not only can the reliability be notified by the light emission mode of the backlight, but the player's sense of expectation with respect to fluctuations with high reliability can be more effectively enhanced.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, a description will be given of changes to the special figure normal processing.
Although illustration is omitted, in the special figure routine process of the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, a process for determining whether or not to move the movable accessory 83 of the movable body device 80 is also performed. To do. And the setting for transmitting to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 the fluctuation pattern determined by this process and the information regarding operation | movement of the movable accessory 83 as a fluctuation pattern command is performed.
When the game control device 100 executes this special figure normal processing, a pattern in which the movable accessory operates and a pattern in which the movable accessory does not operate are generated in the special figure variation display game. Therefore, the game control device 100 has a function of transmitting to the effect control means 300 a control command including information relating to the contents of the variable display game and information relating to whether or not the movable accessory 83 is to be operated. .

[Moving object control processing]
Next, changes in the movable body control process (step B27) in the 1st CPU main process will be described.
Although a specific description of this process is omitted in the second embodiment, the movable body control process of this embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment in that processes associated with generation and release of a power saving state are added. Is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, first, branch processing (step B101) is performed according to the movable body processing number. When the movable body processing number is “0” in step B101, initialization sequence processing (step B102) is performed, and when the movable body processing number is “1”, normal sequence processing (step B103) is performed. When the movable body processing number is “2” in step B101, a power saving start sequence process (step B104) for setting the movable bodies of the rendering devices 44 and 45 (movable accessory 83 of the movable body device 80) to a power saving state is performed. If the movable body process number is “3”, a power saving cancellation sequence process (step B105) for canceling the power saving state of the movable body is performed.

[Initialization sequence processing]
In the initialization sequence process (step B102) in the movable body control process described above, as shown in FIG. 134, it is first determined whether or not the power saving function is turned on (step B111). Here, when it is determined that the power saving function is turned on (step B111; Yes), the initialization sequence process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power saving function is turned off (step B111; No), a process for starting an initialization operation for moving the movable body to the initial position is performed (step B112), and the movable body is initialized. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step B113). Here, when it is determined that the movable body is not detected at the initial position, that is, when it is determined that the movable body is moving toward the initial position (step B113; No), the process of step B113 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is detected that the movable body is in the initial position (step B113; Yes), the initialization operation is stopped (step B114), the movable body processing number is set to 1 (step B115), and the initialization is performed. End the sequence process.

  When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, the movable accessory 83 moves to the initial position after the power is turned on or the power saving state is released. Further, since this process does not include a process for determining the contents of the variation pattern command, the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83 is not interrupted in the middle. Therefore, the production control device 300 serves as an initial position detecting means for detecting whether or not the movable accessory is in the initial position, and when the game machine is turned on or when the power saving state is released. Confirms whether or not the movable accessory is at the initial position by the initial position detection means, and if not, the function for executing the initialization operation for moving the movable accessory to the initial position or the movable accessory When a control command including that the movable accessory is not operated is received from the game control means during the initialization operation, the display device displays a variable display game based on the control command, while the movable device is displayed. Has a function of continuously performing the operation of initializing the movable accessory without stopping until the movable accessory moves to the initial position.

[Normal sequence processing]
In the normal sequence process (step B103) in the movable body control process described above, as shown in FIG. 135, it is first determined whether or not it is time to start the special figure variation display game (step B121). Here, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the special figure variation display game (step B121; No), the normal sequence process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to start the special figure variation display game (step B121; Yes), the presence / absence of the movement of the movable body is determined based on the variation pattern. Processing to determine is performed (step B122), and the presence / absence of the operation of the movable body is determined (step B123). Here, when it determines with there being no operation | movement of a movable body (step B123; No), a normal sequence process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an operation of the movable body (step B123; Yes), a process for starting the operation of the movable body according to the determined operation pattern is performed (step B124), and the normal sequence process is terminated.

[Power saving start sequence processing]
In the power saving start sequence process (step B104) in the movable body control process described above, as shown in FIG. 136, first, whether or not the movable body is in a power saving state, that is, the operation mode of the movable body becomes the power saving operation mode. It is determined whether or not (step B131). Here, when it is determined that the movable body is in the power saving state (step B131; Yes), the power saving start sequence process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body is not in the power saving state (step B131; No), a process for setting the movable body in the power saving state is performed (step B132), and the power saving start sequence process is terminated.

  When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, the movable accessory 83 comes down during power saving, and a part of the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is shielded by the movable accessory 83. Therefore, the production control device 300 has a function of moving it forward of the movable accessory 83 display device 41 when generating the power saving state.

[Power-saving cancellation sequence processing]
In the power saving cancellation sequence process (step B105) in the above-described movable body control process, as shown in FIG. 137, first, a process for starting the operation so that the movable body is in a non-power saving state is performed (step B141). The body process number is set to 1, and the power saving cancellation sequence process is terminated.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 10 after the power is turned on will be described.
When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 138, 24V, 32V, 12V, and 5V are generated in the power supply device 400 and the initialization process of the game control device 100 is started ( t71). The power saving function is disabled for a predetermined period (t71 to t75) after the power is turned on. When the initialization process of the game control device 100 is completed, a power-on command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (t72), and monitoring of the position of the movable accessory 83 is started. At this time, if the movable accessory 83 is located at a position other than the initial position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 33A (for example, in front of the display device 41 indicated by the solid line in FIG. 33A), the movable object The initialization operation of the device 80 is started. When the movable accessory 83 finishes moving to the initial position, it enters the standby state as it is (t74).

  Moreover, when the initialization process of the game control device 100 is completed, the effect control device 300 supplies power to the display device 41, and the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is in a power-on mode (a state in which symbols and the like can be displayed). (T72). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the display mode of the display unit 41a changes from a power-on mode to a variation display mode for displaying a decorative special figure variation display game ( t73). Then, after the special symbol change display is performed for a predetermined period (t73 to t76), the display mode of the display unit 41a changes to the stop display mode in which the special symbol is stopped (t76).

  In this gaming machine 10, a variation pattern command may be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 during the initialization operation of the movable body device 80, and a special figure variation display game may be started (t73). Further, the variation pattern command may have a content instructing that the movable accessory 83 is not operated. However, even in such a case, as long as the movable accessory 83 is not in the initial position, the movable body initialization operation is continued, and as soon as the movable accessory 83 returns to the initial position indicated by the broken line in FIG. A standby state is entered (t74).

  In a conventional gaming machine, the movable accessory is initialized during a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and a power-on screen indicating that the game is being initialized is displayed on the display device. For this reason, it is not possible to simultaneously confirm the operation check of the movable accessory at the time of power-on and the operation check of the variable display game on the display device executed based on the detection of the game ball by the start port switch. In this inspection, when checking the operation of the variable display game, it is necessary to wait until the initialization operation is completed, and the inspection work cannot be efficiently performed. However, if such an operation is performed, the initialization of the movable accessory and the start confirmation of the variable display game can be performed in parallel, and the efficiency of the inspection work can be increased.

(Modification)
In the present embodiment, the movable body may be initialized not only after the power is turned on but also when either the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened. In this case, for example, a power-saving frame opening monitoring process is performed in a process (for example, a 1st CPU main process) that is repeatedly executed while power is supplied to the gaming machine.

[Power saving middle frame opening monitoring process]
In the power saving frame opening monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 139, it is first determined whether or not the power saving function is in operation (step B301). Here, when it is determined that the power saving function is not in operation (step B301; No), the power saving frame opening monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving function is in operation (step B301; Yes), the state of the front frame opening switch is acquired (step B302), and whether or not the glass frame (front frame) 15 is opened. That is, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error command is received from the game control apparatus 100 (step B303). Here, when it is determined that the glass frame 15 is opened (step B303; Yes), the movable body processing number is set to 0 (step B306), and the power saving frame opening monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the glass frame 15 is not opened (step B303; No), the state of the game frame release switch is acquired (step B304), and whether or not the front frame (game frame) 12 is opened. That is, it is determined whether or not a front frame opening error command has been received from the game control apparatus 100 (step B305). Here, when it determines with the front frame 12 being open | released (step B305; Yes), the process of step B306 is performed and a power-saving middle frame open | release monitoring process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it determines with the front frame 12 not being open | released (step B306; No), a power saving frame open | release monitoring process is complete | finished.

When the effect control device 300 executes the above processing, the movable accessory 83 returns to the initial position after the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened. Therefore, during power saving (when the motor excitation is off), even if the frame is opened for maintenance, etc., and the movable body moves by hitting the movable body, the movable body is not in its initial position. It can be resumed and trouble can be prevented. Therefore, the production control device 300 has a function of monitoring whether or not the front frame 12 is opened and performing an initialization operation when detecting that the front frame is opened. .
In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the frame is released based on the presence / absence of a frame release error command transmitted from the game control device 100. For example, detection of the opening of the front frame connected to the game control device 100 is performed. By connecting the switch 63 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 only to the effect control device 300 or to both the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 may directly detect the opening of the frame. good.

  As described above, the game control means (game control device 100) included in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the effect control of a predetermined power saving start command signal (power saving start command) when a predetermined power saving start condition is satisfied. When the release operation detecting means (effect control apparatus 300) detects a predetermined release operation, a predetermined power saving release command signal (power saving release command) is transmitted to the effect control means 300. The effect control means 300 is movable based on the initial position detection means (effect control apparatus 300) for detecting whether or not the movable accessory 83 is in the initial position and the power saving start command signal. The power consumed in the body device 80 is reduced, and the power saving state in which the operation mode of the movable accessory 83 becomes the predetermined power saving operation mode is generated, and the power saving release command signal is received. And a power-saving control means (production control device 300) for performing control for releasing the power-saving state, and when the power-saving release command signal is received, the power-saving state is generated after the power-saving start command signal is received. When the power saving state is canceled in a time shorter than the time required until the power saving state is released, the initial position detection unit 300 confirms whether or not the movable accessory 83 is in the initial position, If it is not in the position, an initialization operation for moving the movable accessory 80 to the initial position is executed.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 that produce the game are in the power saving state, so that the game managed by the game control means 100 is used. The power consumption can be reduced without any influence.
In addition, when the power saving state is released, the movable member 83 is initialized. Therefore, when the movable role 83 is in the power saving operation mode, the movable role 83 starts normal operation when the power saving state is released. It is possible to prevent a situation in which operation cannot be performed from the position (initial position).
Furthermore, if the player performs a predetermined release operation while the power saving state is occurring, the power saving state is released in a time shorter than the time required from the establishment of the power saving start condition until the power saving state is started. The player's desire to resume the game as soon as possible during the occurrence can give the impression that it is reflected in the operation of the gaming machine 10 and prevents the player from being dissatisfied with the power saving function be able to.

  In addition, the decoration device provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a display device 41 that can display a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) for displaying the identification information in a variable manner, an initial position, and a position other than the initial position. And a movable body device 80 having a movable combination 83 movable between predetermined positions. The game control means 100 determines whether or not to perform information on the contents of the variable display game and the operation of the movable combination 83. A control command including information related to information is transmitted to the effect control means 300, and the effect control means 300 includes an initial position detection means 300 that detects whether or not the movable accessory 83 is in the initial position, and is transmitted from the game control means 100. The game machine 10 has a function of determining whether to display the contents of the variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and whether or not to move the movable accessory 83 based on the control command. If it is entered, the initial position detecting means 300 confirms whether or not the movable accessory 83 is in the initial position. If it is not in the initial position, an initialization operation for moving the movable accessory 83 to the initial position is performed. When the control command including that the movable accessory 83 is not operated is received from the game control means 100 during the execution of the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83, the display device 41 displays the variable display based on the control command. While the game is displayed, the movable body device 80 continues the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83 without stopping until the movable accessory 83 moves to the initial position.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 that produce the game are in a power-saving state, which affects the game managed by the game control means 100. The power consumption can be reduced without affecting
In addition, while the power saving state occurs, the operation mode of the movable accessory 83 becomes the power saving operation mode, and when the power saving state is canceled, the initialization operation of the movable role 83 is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the movable accessory 83 cannot operate from the normal operation start position (initial position) when the power saving state is released.

In addition, even when a control command for starting a variable display game without operating the movable accessory 83 is received during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83, the movable accessory 83 is movable until the movable accessory 83 returns to the initial position. Since the initializing operation of the accessory 83 is continued, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by executing the variable display game while the movable accessory 83 stops at a halfway position.
In addition, the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83 and the confirmation of the variable display game can be performed at the time of inspection at the time of shipment, and the inspection efficiency can be increased.

In addition, the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a display device 41 capable of displaying a variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner. The movable accessory 83 is moved in front of the display device 41.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory 83 is disposed in front of the display device 41 during the power saving state. That is, from the viewpoint of the player, at least a part of the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is shielded by the movable accessory 83, and the display unit 41a is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. For this reason, even if the display unit 41a is in a non-display state where the effect image is not displayed or is difficult to visually recognize the effect image due to the occurrence of the power saving state, the player feels uncomfortable with respect to the display unit 41a during power saving. Can be prevented.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a main body frame 11 and a front frame 12 that is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 11 and covers the game board 30. Whether or not the front frame 12 has been opened is monitored, and when it is detected that the front frame 12 has been opened, an initialization operation is performed.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the front frame 12 is opened, the initialization operation of the movable accessory 83 is performed. For example, the movable accessory is mistakenly caused by maintenance of the game board 30 or the like. This prevents a situation in which the movable accessory 83 cannot operate from the normal operation start position (initial position) when the front frame 12 is closed due to contact with 83 and the position of the movable accessory 83 has changed. Can do.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes an effect display device having a display unit 41a capable of displaying an effect image including a decoration variation display game for variably displaying a plurality of decoration identification information in association with the progress of the variation display game. (Display device 41) and effect control means 300 for controlling the display of the effect image on the display unit 41a based on a control command transmitted from the game control means 100. The effect display device 41 includes the display unit. The effect image is configured to be visible by causing 41a to emit light, and the luminance of the display unit 41a is configured to be changeable. The effect control unit 300 is configured to display the display unit in association with the progress of the variable display game. The luminance control means (production control device 300) capable of executing luminance reduction control for reducing the luminance of 41a is provided, and the luminance control means 300 derives a special result (big hit) In variable display game not to allow execution of the brightness reduction control, in the variable display game special results are derived, and do not run the brightness reduction control.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the luminance of the display unit 41a during execution of the variable display game does not decrease when a special result is derived in the variable display game, and the special result is not derived. In some cases, it may decline. Therefore, if the brightness of the display unit 41a does not decrease when the variable display game is executed, sufficient effect display is performed with high brightness, and the player expects that a special result will be derived. A feeling can be heightened. On the other hand, if the luminance of the display unit 41a is reduced, it is known in advance that no special result is derived, so that power consumption can be reduced without discouraging the player who expects the special result.

  The game control unit 100 according to the present embodiment displays one variation mode from a plurality of variation modes (variation patterns) that are set so that the reliability indicating the possibility of special results being derived is different. A variation mode selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation mode of the game is provided. The variation mode includes a first variation mode (normal reach, special 1 reach), and a higher reliability than the first variation mode. 2 variation modes (special 2 reach, special 3 reach) are included, and the brightness control means 300 is configured not to execute the brightness reduction control when the second variation mode is selected.

  For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is executed in the second variable mode, the brightness of the display unit 41a does not decrease, so the variable display game is displayed in a highly reliable variable mode. Although the display is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered due to the dark display unit 41a.

In addition, the variation mode of the variation display game executed by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a normal variation mode with a variation time shorter than the first variation mode and the second variation mode, and a variation time than the normal variation mode. The brightness control unit 300 does not execute the brightness reduction control when the variation mode selection unit 100 selects the shortened variation mode.
For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is executed in a shortened variation mode, the luminance of the display unit 41a is maintained at the same luminance as before, so in a short time It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating because the power saving mode switching control is repeatedly performed and the luminance of the display unit 41a frequently changes.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 148. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only different points will be described.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the power saving state of the decoration device can be generated (whether the power saving function is enabled / disabled) based on preset setting information, The decoration mode of various decoration devices in a non-power-saving state is controlled. For this reason, the configuration of the push button unit 25, the data stored in the effect control device 300, and the control processing executed by the effect control device 300 are different from those of the first invention.

First, the push button unit 25 will be described.
Although not shown, the push button unit 25 is provided with a setting start button (not shown) for setting the gaming machine 10 in a state in which setting information can be changed, in addition to the effect button 251 and the selection button 252. . Although details will be described later, when the setting information can be changed, the operation of changing the decoration mode of various decoration devices by the push buttons 251 and 252 becomes possible. Therefore, the push button unit 25 of the present embodiment serves as a setting operation means for the player to perform a predetermined setting operation.
The push button unit 25 is not provided with a setting start button, and the effect button 251 or the selection button 252 is operated in a predetermined operation mode that is not performed in a normal game (for example, pressing both simultaneously). Processing may be started.

Next, the effect control device will be described.
In the effect control apparatus 300 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140A to 140D, three types of settings “gaming machine setting information”, “game shop setting information”, and “player setting information” are set. Information (decoration setting information) is stored. These are all for defining the decoration mode of various decoration devices, but the subject of setting, the settable period, the conditions for starting the setting, and the storage location are different.

The gaming machine setting information is initial information set by the manufacturer when the gaming machine 10 is manufactured, and is stored in the program ROM 321. This gaming machine setting information cannot be changed once stored.
The game store setting information includes a predetermined game store setting information change effective period (change operation effective period: for example, during opening of the front frame and the gaming machine frame, until a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on (becomes ready to play). Until the RAM is initialized, while the error state is generated in the gaming machine, etc.), the game store setting information storage in the built-in RAM 311a. The area and the FeRAM 315 are stored. The game shop setting information may be set by transmitting the setting information from the game hall management device H provided outside the gaming machine 10 to the effect control device 300.
The player setting information is in-game setting information set by the player during a period during which a game can be performed (for example, during a customer waiting demo, during variable display, during a big hit), and the player setting information in the built-in RAM 311a. It is stored in the storage area.
Therefore, the program ROM 321 constitutes an initial information storage means for storing the initial value of the decoration setting information that defines the decoration mode of the decoration device in an unrewritable manner, and the built-in RAM 311a and the FeRAM 315 define the decoration mode of the decoration device during the game. In-game setting information storage means for storing the decoration setting information to be rewritable, and return information storage means for storing rewritable decoration setting information for defining the decoration mode of the decoration device separately from the in-game setting information storage means Will be.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (e), the three types of setting information are “power saving operation setting value”, “volume setting value”, “backlight luminance setting value”, “decorative luminance setting value”, “movable body”, respectively. It consists of five types of setting values “operation setting values”. Each set value can be selected from a plurality of values stored in advance. Each value is associated with an operation or decoration mode of a different decoration device, and the main control microcomputer 311 controls various decoration devices so as to have a decoration mode corresponding to the value selected as the set value. It will be.

The power saving operation setting value is setting information for specifying whether or not to enable the power saving function of the decoration device, and there are two selectable values: “0 (invalid)” and “1 (valid)”. .
The volume setting value is setting information for defining the upper limit output sound level of the speakers 19a and 19b, and there are five selectable values “0 (volume 1)” to “4 (volume 5)”.
The backlight luminance setting value is setting information for defining the upper limit luminance of the display unit 41a of the display device 41, and four values of “0 (luminance 1)” to “3 (luminance 4)” are selectable values. is there.
The decoration brightness setting value is setting information for defining the upper limit brightness of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 44, and is a selectable value from “0 (luminance 1)” to “3 (luminance 4)”. There is one.
The movable body operation setting value is setting information for specifying whether or not to enable the operation function of the movable accessory included in the frame effect device 44 and the board effect device 45. The selectable value is “0 (invalid) ) ”And“ 1 (valid) ”.

  Further, when the setting start button of the push button unit 25 is operated, the main control microcomputer 311 sets / sets game shop setting information as shown in FIG. 148 (a) on the display device 41 according to the operated time. A change screen or a setting / change screen for player setting information as shown in FIG. 148 (c) is displayed on the display device 41. Although the specific flow will be described later, the player can change the setting value of the game shop setting information or the player setting information by pressing the push buttons 251 and 252 while viewing the setting / change screen. It is like that. Instead of changing the set value by operating the push buttons 251, 252, the operation unit 24 may be used for setting / changing operation, or the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is displayed as a touch panel. You may make it operate by touching the part 41a with a hand directly.

In addition, the main control microcomputer 311 detects the game store setting information in the built-in RAM 311a when the manufacturer sets the game machine setting information at the time of manufacture, or when it detects that an error state has occurred in the game machine after the power is turned on. The content of the player setting information and the content of the game store setting information in the FeRAM 315 are rewritten to the same content as the gaming machine setting information. That is, as shown in FIGS. 140A and 140B, the gaming machine 10 immediately after manufacturing or immediately after returning from the error state has each setting value of gaming machine setting information, gaming shop setting information, and player setting information. Each has the same value.
Also, the main control microcomputer 311 stores the game store setting information stored by receiving the power supply from the backup power source 420 even after the gaming machine 10 is powered off (the power supply from the outside is cut off). , And when the gaming machine 10 is initialized (for example, turning on the power before starting business or a predetermined reset operation), the content of the player setting information is the same as the game store setting information of the built-in RAM 311a or FeRAM 315 To be rewritten. That is, in the gaming machine 10 immediately after opening the store and before being operated by the player or immediately after maintenance by the store clerk, the setting values of the game store setting information and the player setting information are the same.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 311 limits selectable values as the setting values of the player setting information based on the contents of the game shop setting information. Specifically, the setting value of the player setting information can be selected only from a plurality of selectable values excluding the value exceeding the setting value of the game shop setting information. For example, there are originally five values “0” to “4” that can be selected as the volume setting value, but the backlight luminance setting value of the game shop setting information is set to “3” as shown in FIG. 140 (d). If it is set, the backlight brightness setting value of the player setting information is selected from four from “0” to “3” (in FIG. 140 (d), the player selects “1”). doing). When the setting value is set to “0” in the game shop setting information, the corresponding setting value of the player setting information cannot be changed (only 0 can be selected).

Next, control executed by the effect control device 300 will be described.
[Push button input processing]
The push button input process is started when the setting start button of the push button unit 25 is operated.
In this process, as shown in FIG. 141, it is first determined whether or not the setting start button has been operated during the amusement shop setting information change valid period (step B401). If it is determined that the game store setting information change valid period is in effect (step B401; Yes), a game store setting information change operation monitoring process is performed (step B402), and the push button input process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game store setting information change valid period is not in effect (step B401; No), a player setting information change operation monitoring process is performed (step B403), and the push button input process is terminated.
Although a description of the specific process is omitted, based on the processing result of step B401, a process for causing the display device 41 to display a game shop setting information change screen or a player setting information change screen is performed.

  By performing such processing in the production control device 300, if the setting start button is operated during the game shop setting information change valid period, the game shop setting information can be changed, and the setting start button outside the period. If is operated, the player setting information can be changed. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can change the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means based on the setting operation of the setting operation means performed during the game-enabled period, and The contents of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means can be changed based on the setting operation of the setting operation means performed during a predetermined change operation valid period.

[Amusement store setting information change operation monitoring process]
In the game shop setting information change operation monitoring process (step B402) in the above-described push button input process, as shown in FIG. 142, it is first determined whether or not a game shop setting information change operation has been performed (step B411). If it is determined that the changing operation has not been performed (step B411; No), the amusement shop setting information changing operation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change operation has been performed (step B411; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving operation setting has been changed (step B412). If it is determined that the power saving operation setting has been changed (step B412; Yes), the changed power saving operation setting is set in the internal RAM 311a (step B413), and the process proceeds to step 414. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving operation setting has not been changed (step B412; No), the process proceeds to step 414.

In step 414, it is determined whether or not the volume setting upper limit has been changed. If it is determined that the volume setting upper limit has been changed (step B414; Yes), the changed volume setting upper limit is set in the internal RAM 311a (step B415), and the process proceeds to step B416. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting upper limit value has not been changed (step B414; No), the process proceeds to step B416.
In step 416, it is determined whether or not the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has been changed. If it is determined that the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has been changed (step B416; Yes), the changed backlight luminance setting upper limit value is set in the internal RAM 311a (step B417), and the process proceeds to step B418. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has not been changed (step B416; No), the process proceeds to step B418.

In step 418, it is determined whether or not the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has been changed. If it is determined that the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has been changed (step B418; Yes), the changed decoration brightness setting upper limit value is set in the internal RAM 311a (step B419), and the process proceeds to step B420. On the other hand, if it is determined that the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has not been changed (step B418; No), the process proceeds to step B420.
In step B420, it is determined whether or not the movable body operation setting has been changed. Here, when it is determined that the movable body operation setting has been changed (step B420; Yes), the changed movable body operation setting is set (step B421), and the amusement shop setting information and check after setting in the built-in RAM 311a. The thumb value is stored in the FeRAM 315 (step B422), and the game shop setting information change operation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body operation setting has not been changed (step B420; No), the game shop setting information change operation monitoring process is terminated.

By performing such processing, the game shop setting information is set based on the operation of the push button unit 25 by the store clerk of the game shop, and the contents of the game shop setting information set later (when power is turned on again) are set. It is copied to the player setting information. That is, the production control device 300 selects one of a plurality of values corresponding to different decoration modes based on the setting operation of the setting operation means, and uses the selected value as decoration setting information. The medium setting information storage means and the return information storage means can be stored.
Note that the game store setting information is not stored in the FeRAM 315 every time the game store setting information is changed, but the process of step B422 is omitted, and the game store setting of the built-in RAM is performed instead in an interrupt (NMI interrupt) process executed when the power is turned off. Information may be stored in FeRAM. If it does so, the frequency | count of a process during operation of a game machine can be decreased, and the burden of the production | presentation control apparatus 300 can be reduced.

[Player setting information change operation monitoring process]
In the player setting information change operation monitoring process (step B403) in the above-described push button input process, as shown in FIG. 143, it is first determined whether or not a player setting information change operation has been performed (step B431). Here, when it is determined that the changing operation is not performed (step B431; No), the player setting information changing operation monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change operation has been performed (step B431; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving operation setting has been changed (step B432). Here, if it is determined that the power saving operation setting has been changed (step B432; Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is within the range of information set at the amusement store (step B433). Here, when it determines with it being in the range (step B433; Yes), the power-saving operation setting after a change is set (step B434), and it progresses to step 435. When it is determined in step B432 that the power saving operation setting has not been changed (step B432; No), in step B433, when it is determined that the change is outside the range of information set in the amusement store (step B433; No). The process proceeds to step B435.

  In step 435, it is determined whether or not the volume setting upper limit has been changed. If it is determined that the volume setting upper limit has been changed (step B435; Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is within the range of information set at the amusement store (step B436). If it is determined that the volume is within the range (step B436; Yes), the changed volume setting upper limit value is set (step B437), and the process proceeds to step 438. When it is determined in step B435 that the volume setting upper limit has not been changed (step B435; No), in step B436, when it is determined that the change is outside the range of information set at the amusement store (step B436; No). Advances to step B438.

  In step 438, it is determined whether or not the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has been changed. Here, when it is determined that the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has been changed (step B438; Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is within the range of information set in the amusement store (step B439). . If it is determined that the range is within the range (step B439; Yes), the changed backlight luminance setting upper limit value is set (step B440), and the process proceeds to step 441. When it is determined in step B438 that the backlight luminance setting upper limit value has not been changed (step B438; No), in step B439, when it is determined that the change is outside the range of information set at the game store (step B439; No) goes to step B441.

  In step 441, it is determined whether or not the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has been changed. Here, if it is determined that the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has been changed (step B441; Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is within the range of information set at the amusement store (step B442). If it is determined that the value is within the range (step B442; Yes), the decoration brightness setting upper limit value after the change is set (step B443), and the process proceeds to step 444. When it is determined in step B441 that the decoration brightness setting upper limit value has not been changed (step B441; No), in step B442, when it is determined that the change is outside the range of information set in the game store (step B442; No) ) Proceeds to step B444.

  In step 444, it is determined whether the movable body operation setting has been changed. Here, when it is determined that the movable body operation setting has been changed (step B444; Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is within the range of information set in the amusement store (step B445). Here, when it determines with it being in the range (step B445; Yes), the movable body operation setting after a change is set (step B446), and a player setting information change operation monitoring process is complete | finished. When it is determined in step B444 that the movable body operation setting has not been changed (step B444; No), in step B445, when it is determined that the change is outside the range of information set in the game store (step B445; No). Ends the player setting information change operation monitoring process.

  When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, the player's presence / absence of power-saving operation, volume, backlight luminance, decoration device luminance, and movable body operation within the range set by the game store are determined. It can be adjusted to your liking. Therefore, when selecting the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means, the effect control apparatus 300 is larger than the value of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means from a plurality of values. It has a function of selecting any one from those excluding the value.

[1st CPU main processing]
Next, differences in the 1st CPU main process of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 144, the first CPU main process of the present embodiment excludes the processes of steps B12 and B14, the processes of steps B30 and B31 after the process of step B13, and the process of step B32 after the process of step B29. Is different from the same processing of the first invention (see FIG. 117) in that each is added. That is, after the process of step B11, the CPU initialization process (step B13), the FeRAM initialization process (step B30), and the internal RAM initialization process (step B31) are performed, and the process proceeds to step B15. Further, after the process of step B29, the setting information initialization process (step B32) is performed, and the process returns to the process of step B18.

Although not shown in the drawings, in steps B24 to B27, processing for determining the validity / invalidity of the power saving function and the operation function of the movable accessory based on each setting value of the player setting information, and various processes in the non power saving state Processing for determining the decoration mode of the decoration device is performed.
When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, the various decoration devices are driven in the decoration mode set by the player (or the decoration mode set by the game store if the player did not set). It becomes like this. Therefore, the effect control device 300 has a function of controlling the decoration mode of the decoration device based on the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means.

[FeRAM initial setting process]
In the FeRAM initial setting process (step B30) in the 1st CPU main process described above, as shown in FIG. 145, first, whether or not the data value of the power failure inspection area 1 of the FeRAM 315 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 is determined. Determine (step B511). Here, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (step B512; Yes), the data value of the power failure inspection area 2 of the FeRAM 315 is normal. It is determined whether or not 2 (step B513). Here, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (step B514; Yes), a process of calculating a checksum is performed (step B515).

  Then, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is turned off (step B516), and it is determined whether or not the values match (step B517). Here, when the values match, that is, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the stored contents of the FeRAM 315 (step B517; Yes), all the power failure inspection areas are cleared (step B518), and the checksum area is cleared. (Step B519). The FeRAM initial setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step B512 that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is not normal (step B512; No), when it is determined in step B514 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is not normal (step B514; No), a check is performed in step B517. If it is determined that the thumbs do not match, that is, the content stored in the FeRAM 315 is abnormal (step B517; No), the contents of the game store setting information stored in the FeRAM 315 are stored in the gaming machine setting information stored in the ROM. (Step B520), and the FeRAM initial setting process is terminated.

[Internal RAM initial setting processing]
In the built-in RAM initial setting process (step B31) in the above-mentioned 1st CPU main process, as shown in FIG. 146, first, whether or not the data value of the power failure check area 1 of the built-in RAM 311a is the normal power failure check area check data 1 Is determined (step B501). Here, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (step B502; Yes), the data value of the power failure inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2. It is determined whether or not there is (step B503). If it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the built-in RAM 311a is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (step B504; Yes), a process of calculating a checksum is performed (step B505).

  Then, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is shut off (step B506), and it is determined whether or not the values match (step B507). Here, when the values match, that is, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the stored contents of the internal RAM 311a (step B507; Yes), all the power failure inspection areas are cleared (step B508), and the checksum area is cleared. (Step B509). Then, the contents of the player setting information are rewritten to the contents of the game shop setting information stored in the built-in RAM 311a (step B510), and the RAM initial setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step B502 that the value of power failure inspection area 1 is not normal (step B502; No), if it is determined in step B504 that the value of power failure inspection area 2 is not normal (step B504; No), a check is made in step B507. If it is determined that the thumbs do not match, that is, the stored contents of the internal RAM 311a are abnormal (step B507; No), the contents of the game store setting information and the player setting information stored in the internal RAM are stored in the FeRAM 315. The contents are changed to the contents of the game store setting information that has been set (step B511), and the RAM initial setting process is terminated.
Note that after rewriting the contents in step B511, the game shop setting information stored in the FeRAM 315 may be cleared.

  When the effect control device 300 executes the FeRAM initial setting process and the built-in RAM initial setting process, if an error state occurs in the FeRAM 315 and the built-in RAM 311a when the power is turned on, various decoration devices are shipped (by the manufacturer). It is possible to drive in the set decoration mode, and if any of the FeRAM 315 and the built-in RAM 311a has an error state, or if neither has an error state, various decoration devices are set in the amusement store. It becomes possible to drive in the decorative mode. In addition, since the FeRAM continues to store the game store setting information, even if an error state in which the power is turned off occurs, after the power is turned on, it can be driven in the decoration mode set in the game store as it is. Therefore, when the predetermined return operation is performed, the production control device 300 changes the content of the decoration setting information stored in the in-game setting information storage unit to the content of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit. And the decoration setting information stored in the initial information storage means based on the state of the gaming machine and the decoration settings stored in the return information storage means when the gaming machine is powered on. A function of selecting any one of the information and rewriting the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means to the contents of the selected decoration setting information, and the contents stored in the return information storage means at power-on When it is detected that an abnormality has occurred, the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means are stored in the decoration setting information stored in the initial information storage means. If no abnormality is detected in the stored contents of the return information storage means when the power is turned on, the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means are stored in the return information storage. It has a function of rewriting the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the means.

[Setting information initialization processing]
In the setting information initialization process (step B31) in the 1st CPU main process described above, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is being opened (step B601). If it is determined that the button is being opened (step B601; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the effect button switch 251a (step B602). If it is determined that there is an input (step B602; Yes), it is determined whether there is an input to the selection button switch (step B603). If it is determined that there is an input (step B603; Yes), the contents of the player setting information are rewritten to the contents of the game shop setting information stored in the internal RAM 311a (step B604), and the setting information is initialized. The process ends.

If it is determined in step B601 that the glass frame 15 is not open (step B601; No), or if it is determined in step B602 that there is no input to the effect button switch (step B602; No), a selection button switch in step B603. If it is determined that there is no input (step B603; No), the setting information initialization process is terminated.
When the effect control device 300 executes such processing, when the effect button 251 and the selection button 252 are pressed in a state where the glass frame 15 is opened (when a predetermined reset operation is performed), various decoration devices are used. It returns to the state which can be driven in the decoration mode set in the amusement store. Therefore, when the predetermined return operation is performed, the effect control device 300 uses the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means to store the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means. It has a function of rewriting to the contents of.
Note that the reset operation is not limited to the opening of the glass frame 15 and the operation of the push buttons 251 and 252 but can be changed by changing the processing contents of steps B601 to B603.

Next, an example of the flow of setting various setting information will be described.
When the setting start button is pressed during the game shop setting information change valid period, the game shop setting information change screen is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41. For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the amusement shop setting information change screen is an icon in which the name n of the amusement shop setting information and selectable operations and decoration modes (values that can be selected as setting values) are written. In addition, icons id, ir, ie, etc. on which various operations (decision, change are reflected, end) are displayed. Then, the name n of the game shop setting information that can be changed and the display mode of the icon in being set are made different from those of others (for example, shaded display, color is changed (selected color)). This makes it possible to recognize the currently selected game shop setting information and setting values (operation and decoration mode). In the screen shown in FIG. 148 (a), the movable body operation setting value can be changed at present, the power saving function is currently effective, the volume level is 1, the backlight luminance is 3, the decoration luminance is 3, and the movable body operation is performed. Indicates that is enabled.

  Then, by operating the effect button 251 and the selection button 252, the game shop setting information to be changed is selected, and further, the icon of the operation or decoration mode to be changed is selected. Then, when the effect button 251 is pressed with the determination icon id selected, the change is confirmed. Further, when the effect button 251 is pressed while the reflection icon ir is selected, the change is reflected. When the effect button 251 is pressed while the end icon ie is selected, the game store setting information changing operation is ended.

Although not described so far, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the amusement shop setting information display setting screen on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 after the amusement shop setting information is changed. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the amusement shop setting information display setting screen displays the name n of each amusement shop setting information, an icon is indicating whether each information is valid or invalid, and the like. And, by changing the display mode of the name n of the game shop setting information that can be changed at present and the icon is being set, it is possible to recognize the game shop setting information that can be changed and the current state. And Here, if the player does not want to change the player setting information, the selection button 252 is operated in the same manner as the setting of the game store setting information to enable / disable the change of each player setting information. Set. Finally, when the effect button 251 is pressed in a state where the end icon ie is selected, the display setting operation of the game shop setting information is ended.
If the player can always change all five types of player setting information, this game store setting information display setting screen may not be displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting start button is pressed during the period when the game is possible, a player setting information change screen as shown in FIG. 148 (c) is displayed on the display unit 41 a of the display device 41. The player setting information change screen has the same layout as the game store setting information change screen shown in FIG. 148 (a), for example, and is invalidated on the game store setting information display setting screen (the player is not allowed to change it). ) The name of the amusement shop setting information and the corresponding icon are not displayed so that the possibility of changing the setting itself cannot be recognized. In addition, icons that correspond to values exceeding the set value of the game store setting information, that is, icons that cannot be selected by the player, are displayed in a display mode different from other icons (for example, light colors or broken lines), and the player cannot select. Make it recognizable. It should be noted that icons that cannot be selected by the player may be displayed as usual so that only selection is not possible.
Here, in the same way as when setting the amusement store setting information, when the user wants to change the current setting information by operating the push buttons 251 and 252, the icons indicating the desired operation and decoration mode are selected colors. Change player setting information. Finally, when the effect button 251 is pressed in a state where the icon “IE” written as “END” is selected, the display setting operation of the amusement shop setting information is ended.

  As described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a decoration device (frame decoration device 18, speakers 19a and 19b, display device 41, board decoration device 42, Game setting information storage means (built-in RAM 311a) for storing rewritable decoration setting information (player setting information) that defines the decoration mode of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 (movable accessory device 80)); Separately from the game setting information storage means 311a, return information storage means for storing decoration setting information (game shop setting information) that defines the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 in a rewritable manner. (Built-in RAM 311a), and based on the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means 311a, the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 4 , 44, and 45, and a setting operation means (button unit 25) for performing the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the in-game setting information storage means 311a during the game period. The decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a can be changed during a predetermined change operation valid period (game shop setting information change valid period). Based on the setting operation of the setting operation means 25, it is possible to change the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means 311a when a predetermined return operation is performed. The contents of the decoration setting information stored in the means 311a are rewritten.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined return operation is performed, the decoration setting information stored in the in-game setting information storage unit 311a during the game is stored in the return information storage unit 311a. It is rewritten to what has been. That is, when the return operation is performed, the setting related to the decoration mode changed by the player is immediately returned to the setting predetermined in the game store. For this reason, the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 that have been changed during the game can be displayed by simply performing a return operation, that is, without performing a specific setting change operation. It is possible to efficiently reset to the predetermined decoration mode set in.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a main body frame 11 and a front frame 12 which is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 11 and covers a game board on which a predetermined game area is formed. 300 can change the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a based on the setting operation of the setting operation unit 25 performed during the period when the front frame 12 is opened. .

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a is usually during the period when the front frame 12 that can be opened and closed only by persons involved in the gaming store is open. Therefore, it is possible to change the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means 311a only for those related to the game shop, so that it can be prevented from being changed by the player. .
In addition, the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means 311a can be changed at any time while the game machine 10 is powered on, except when the player is playing a game. Can be performed more efficiently.

Further, the production control means 300 of the present embodiment selects any one of a plurality of values corresponding to different decoration modes based on the setting operation of the setting operation means 25, and selects the selected value (setting Value) can be stored in the game setting information storage means 311a and the return information storage means 311a as decoration setting information, and when the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means 311a is selected, Any one is selected from a plurality of values excluding a value larger than the value of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the decoration setting information stored in the in-game setting information storage unit 311a can be set within a range not exceeding the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration setting information not intended by the game store from being set by the player.

  In addition, the return information storage unit 311a of the present embodiment can hold the stored decoration setting information by receiving power supply from the backup power supply 420 when the external power supply is cut off. The production control means 300 stores the initial value (gaming machine setting information) of the decoration setting information in which the decoration mode of the decoration device 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, 45 is defined in an unrewritable initial state. When it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the stored contents of the return information storage means 311a when the power is turned on, the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means 311a is provided. Is replaced with the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the initial information storage means 321, and there is an abnormality in the storage contents of the return information storage means 311 a when the power is turned on. If it is not detected that the game is in progress, the content of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage unit 311a is rewritten to the content of the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage unit 311a. I have to.

For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the decoration setting information in the return information storage unit 311a is held regardless of whether the gaming machine 10 is powered on by the backup power source 420 and is restored when the power is turned on. If there is no abnormality in the stored contents of the information storage means 311a, the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage means 311a is rewritten with the decoration setting information stored in the return information storage means 311a. That is, each time the power is turned on, the setting related to the decoration mode changed by the player is returned to the setting predetermined in the game store. For this reason, it is not necessary for the store clerk of the amusement store to set the decoration mode of the decoration devices 18, 19a, 19b, 41, 42, 44, and 45 again after the power is turned on. It can be done more efficiently.
Even if an abnormality occurs in the stored contents of the return information storage unit 311a when the power is turned on, the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage unit 311a is stored in the initial information storage unit 321. Since the information is rewritten, efficient setting work can be performed more reliably.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 according to the present embodiment has the decoration setting information and return information stored in the initial information storage unit 321 based on the state of the gaming machine 10 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Any one of the decoration setting information stored in the storage unit 311a is selected, and the content of the decoration setting information stored in the game setting information storage unit 311a is rewritten to the content of the selected decoration setting information. Yes.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the content of the decoration setting information stored in the in-game setting information storage unit 311a is the initial information storage unit 321 or the return information storage according to the state of the gaming machine 10. Since the contents of the decoration setting information stored in the means 311a are rewritten, the decoration devices 18, 19a, and 19b that have been changed during the game only by turning on the power, that is, without performing a specific setting change operation. , 41, 42, 44, 45 can be efficiently reset to a predetermined decoration mode set in the game store.
Further, in the present embodiment, the volume setting upper limit value in the game store is set by the push button unit 25, but it may be set by a volume control switch provided on the back side of the gaming machine.
In this case, when the above-mentioned game shop setting information change screen is displayed, the change may be performed, and the volume corresponding to the volume switch may be displayed in real time in conjunction with the volume adjustment switch.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, pachislot gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrows, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use gaming balls such as ball gaming machines.
Further, the above-described embodiments may be applied singly or in combination as appropriate.
In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 Gaming machines (Pachinko machines)
11 Body frame 12 Front frame 18 Frame decoration device (decoration device)
25 Button unit (setting operation means)
29 Volume control switch (Volume setting means)
30 game board 41 display device (decoration device, effect display device)
42,44 Panel decoration device (decoration device)
45 Frame production device (decoration device)
70a to 70f Compound resistors 78a and 78b to 78h Output port IC (device arranged in a plurality of selection regions)
80 Movable body device (decoration device)
83 Movable accessory 100 Game control device (game control means, change display game execution means, operation contact detection means, change mode selection means)
111 Microcomputer for game (game control means)
111A CPU (game control means)
111C RAM (storage means)
113 Oscillator circuit (clock signal output means)
121 Interface IC for proximity switch (interface means)
122 Input port IC (detection information transmission means)
132, 135, 136 Output port IC (detection information transmission means)
181 I / O expansion chip (I / O expansion means, selection signal output means, address decoding means)
182 Decoding circuit (address decoding means)
300 effect control device (effect control means, power saving control means, initial position detection means, brightness control means, volume setting means)
311a Built-in RAM (game setting information storage means, return information storage means)
315 FeRAM (game setting information storage means, return information storage means)
321 ROM (initial information storage means)
420 Backup power supply (backup power supply)
431 Power supply monitoring circuit (reset signal output means, power failure detection signal output means)
P1, COM Common terminal pin (Common terminal)
P2 to P9 terminal pins (individual terminals)
H Amusement park management device

Claims (2)

A game control device having game control means for comprehensively controlling a game, and capable of giving a player a specific game value in response to detection of a predetermined game medium;
A clock signal output means for outputting an operation clock signal of the game control means or a clock signal based thereon;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game control device includes:
A plurality of resistance elements, a common terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected together and a predetermined voltage is applied from the outside, and a plurality of terminals in which the other terminal of the plurality of resistance elements is connected to each element A composite resistor having individual terminals, and
One of the individual terminals of the composite resistor is connected to a signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means, and a predetermined voltage is applied via the resistance element. The clock signal output means can be configured to transmit a predetermined range of voltage levels as the clock signal to the game control means,
Among the plurality of individual terminals of the composite resistor, the same voltage as the predetermined voltage applied to the common terminal is applied to some of the individual terminals without connecting the signal wiring. A gaming machine characterized by The signal wiring for transmitting a clock signal from the clock signal output means to the game control means is composed of a wiring pattern of a conductive layer formed on an insulating substrate, and the insulating substrate is placed in the middle of the wiring pattern. A through hole is formed through which the individual terminals of the composite resistor can be connected to penetrate,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the composite resistor is connected to the wiring pattern through the through hole.